Mercurial > vim
annotate src/gui_gtk_x11.c @ 2233:43cad213cb7f vim73
A bit of cleanup and simplification for undofile.
author | Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org> |
---|---|
date | Sun, 30 May 2010 16:01:37 +0200 |
parents | 8c6a66e2b3cc |
children | 63157185aea5 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
7 | 1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4: |
2 * | |
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar | |
4 * | |
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions. | |
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed. | |
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code. | |
8 */ | |
9 | |
10 /* | |
11 * Porting to GTK+ was done by: | |
12 * | |
70 | 13 * (C) 1998,1999,2000 by Marcin Dalecki <martin@dalecki.de> |
7 | 14 * |
15 * With GREAT support and continuous encouragements by Andy Kahn and of | |
16 * course Bram Moolenaar! | |
17 * | |
18 * Support for GTK+ 2 was added by: | |
19 * | |
20 * (C) 2002,2003 Jason Hildebrand <jason@peaceworks.ca> | |
21 * Daniel Elstner <daniel.elstner@gmx.net> | |
22 */ | |
23 | |
24 #include "vim.h" | |
1666 | 25 |
7 | 26 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME |
27 /* Gnome redefines _() and N_(). Grrr... */ | |
28 # ifdef _ | |
29 # undef _ | |
30 # endif | |
31 # ifdef N_ | |
32 # undef N_ | |
33 # endif | |
34 # ifdef textdomain | |
35 # undef textdomain | |
36 # endif | |
37 # ifdef bindtextdomain | |
38 # undef bindtextdomain | |
39 # endif | |
1286 | 40 # ifdef bind_textdomain_codeset |
41 # undef bind_textdomain_codeset | |
1226 | 42 # endif |
7 | 43 # if defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) && !defined(ENABLE_NLS) |
44 # define ENABLE_NLS /* so the texts in the dialog boxes are translated */ | |
45 # endif | |
46 # include <gnome.h> | |
47 # include "version.h" | |
798 | 48 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
49 /* missing prototype in bonobo-dock-item.h */ | |
50 extern void bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(BonoboDockItem *dock_item, BonoboDockItemBehavior beh); | |
51 # endif | |
7 | 52 #endif |
53 | |
54 #if !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && defined(PROTO) | |
55 /* When generating prototypes we don't want syntax errors. */ | |
56 # define GdkAtom int | |
57 # define GdkEventExpose int | |
58 # define GdkEventFocus int | |
59 # define GdkEventVisibility int | |
60 # define GdkEventProperty int | |
61 # define GtkContainer int | |
62 # define GtkTargetEntry int | |
63 # define GtkType int | |
64 # define GtkWidget int | |
65 # define gint int | |
66 # define gpointer int | |
67 # define guint int | |
68 # define GdkEventKey int | |
69 # define GdkEventSelection int | |
70 # define GtkSelectionData int | |
71 # define GdkEventMotion int | |
72 # define GdkEventButton int | |
73 # define GdkDragContext int | |
74 # define GdkEventConfigure int | |
75 # define GdkEventClient int | |
76 #else | |
77 # include <gdk/gdkkeysyms.h> | |
78 # include <gdk/gdk.h> | |
79 # ifdef WIN3264 | |
80 # include <gdk/gdkwin32.h> | |
81 # else | |
82 # include <gdk/gdkx.h> | |
83 # endif | |
84 | |
85 # include <gtk/gtk.h> | |
86 # include "gui_gtk_f.h" | |
87 #endif | |
88 | |
89 #ifdef HAVE_X11_SUNKEYSYM_H | |
90 # include <X11/Sunkeysym.h> | |
91 #endif | |
92 | |
93 /* | |
94 * Easy-to-use macro for multihead support. | |
95 */ | |
96 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
97 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom_for_display( \ | |
98 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin), atom) | |
99 #else | |
100 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) ((Atom)(atom)) | |
101 #endif | |
102 | |
103 /* Selection type distinguishers */ | |
104 enum | |
105 { | |
106 TARGET_TYPE_NONE, | |
107 TARGET_UTF8_STRING, | |
108 TARGET_STRING, | |
109 TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT, | |
1904 | 110 TARGET_HTML, |
7 | 111 TARGET_TEXT, |
112 TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST, | |
113 TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN, | |
114 TARGET_VIM, | |
115 TARGET_VIMENC | |
116 }; | |
117 | |
118 /* | |
119 * Table of selection targets supported by Vim. | |
120 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first. | |
121 */ | |
122 static const GtkTargetEntry selection_targets[] = | |
123 { | |
124 {VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIMENC}, | |
125 {VIM_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIM}, | |
126 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 127 {"text/html", 0, TARGET_HTML}, |
7 | 128 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING}, |
129 #endif | |
130 {"COMPOUND_TEXT", 0, TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT}, | |
131 {"TEXT", 0, TARGET_TEXT}, | |
132 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING} | |
133 }; | |
134 #define N_SELECTION_TARGETS (sizeof(selection_targets) / sizeof(selection_targets[0])) | |
135 | |
136 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
137 /* | |
138 * Table of DnD targets supported by Vim. | |
139 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first. | |
140 */ | |
141 static const GtkTargetEntry dnd_targets[] = | |
142 { | |
143 {"text/uri-list", 0, TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST}, | |
144 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 145 {"text/html", 0, TARGET_HTML}, |
7 | 146 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING}, |
147 # endif | |
148 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING}, | |
149 {"text/plain", 0, TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN} | |
150 }; | |
151 # define N_DND_TARGETS (sizeof(dnd_targets) / sizeof(dnd_targets[0])) | |
152 #endif | |
153 | |
154 | |
155 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
156 /* | |
157 * "Monospace" is a standard font alias that should be present | |
158 * on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations. | |
159 */ | |
160 # define DEFAULT_FONT "Monospace 10" | |
161 | |
162 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
163 /* | |
164 * This is the single only fixed width font in X11, which seems to be present | |
165 * on all servers and available in all the variants we need. | |
166 */ | |
167 # define DEFAULT_FONT "-adobe-courier-medium-r-normal-*-14-*-*-*-m-*-*-*" | |
168 | |
169 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
170 | |
171 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
172 /* | |
173 * Atoms used to communicate save-yourself from the X11 session manager. There | |
174 * is no need to move them into the GUI struct, since they should be constant. | |
175 */ | |
176 static GdkAtom wm_protocols_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
177 static GdkAtom save_yourself_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
178 #endif | |
179 | |
180 /* | |
181 * Atoms used to control/reference X11 selections. | |
182 */ | |
183 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 184 static GdkAtom html_atom = GDK_NONE; |
7 | 185 static GdkAtom utf8_string_atom = GDK_NONE; |
186 #endif | |
187 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
188 static GdkAtom compound_text_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
189 static GdkAtom text_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
190 #endif | |
191 static GdkAtom vim_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's own special selection format */ | |
192 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
193 static GdkAtom vimenc_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's extended selection format */ | |
194 #endif | |
195 | |
196 /* | |
197 * Keycodes recognized by vim. | |
198 * NOTE: when changing this, the table in gui_x11.c probably needs the same | |
199 * change! | |
200 */ | |
201 static struct special_key | |
202 { | |
203 guint key_sym; | |
204 char_u code0; | |
205 char_u code1; | |
206 } | |
207 const special_keys[] = | |
208 { | |
209 {GDK_Up, 'k', 'u'}, | |
210 {GDK_Down, 'k', 'd'}, | |
211 {GDK_Left, 'k', 'l'}, | |
212 {GDK_Right, 'k', 'r'}, | |
213 {GDK_F1, 'k', '1'}, | |
214 {GDK_F2, 'k', '2'}, | |
215 {GDK_F3, 'k', '3'}, | |
216 {GDK_F4, 'k', '4'}, | |
217 {GDK_F5, 'k', '5'}, | |
218 {GDK_F6, 'k', '6'}, | |
219 {GDK_F7, 'k', '7'}, | |
220 {GDK_F8, 'k', '8'}, | |
221 {GDK_F9, 'k', '9'}, | |
222 {GDK_F10, 'k', ';'}, | |
223 {GDK_F11, 'F', '1'}, | |
224 {GDK_F12, 'F', '2'}, | |
225 {GDK_F13, 'F', '3'}, | |
226 {GDK_F14, 'F', '4'}, | |
227 {GDK_F15, 'F', '5'}, | |
228 {GDK_F16, 'F', '6'}, | |
229 {GDK_F17, 'F', '7'}, | |
230 {GDK_F18, 'F', '8'}, | |
231 {GDK_F19, 'F', '9'}, | |
232 {GDK_F20, 'F', 'A'}, | |
233 {GDK_F21, 'F', 'B'}, | |
234 {GDK_Pause, 'F', 'B'}, /* Pause == F21 according to netbeans.txt */ | |
235 {GDK_F22, 'F', 'C'}, | |
236 {GDK_F23, 'F', 'D'}, | |
237 {GDK_F24, 'F', 'E'}, | |
238 {GDK_F25, 'F', 'F'}, | |
239 {GDK_F26, 'F', 'G'}, | |
240 {GDK_F27, 'F', 'H'}, | |
241 {GDK_F28, 'F', 'I'}, | |
242 {GDK_F29, 'F', 'J'}, | |
243 {GDK_F30, 'F', 'K'}, | |
244 {GDK_F31, 'F', 'L'}, | |
245 {GDK_F32, 'F', 'M'}, | |
246 {GDK_F33, 'F', 'N'}, | |
247 {GDK_F34, 'F', 'O'}, | |
248 {GDK_F35, 'F', 'P'}, | |
249 #ifdef SunXK_F36 | |
250 {SunXK_F36, 'F', 'Q'}, | |
251 {SunXK_F37, 'F', 'R'}, | |
252 #endif | |
253 {GDK_Help, '%', '1'}, | |
254 {GDK_Undo, '&', '8'}, | |
255 {GDK_BackSpace, 'k', 'b'}, | |
256 {GDK_Insert, 'k', 'I'}, | |
257 {GDK_Delete, 'k', 'D'}, | |
258 {GDK_3270_BackTab, 'k', 'B'}, | |
259 {GDK_Clear, 'k', 'C'}, | |
260 {GDK_Home, 'k', 'h'}, | |
261 {GDK_End, '@', '7'}, | |
262 {GDK_Prior, 'k', 'P'}, | |
263 {GDK_Next, 'k', 'N'}, | |
264 {GDK_Print, '%', '9'}, | |
265 /* Keypad keys: */ | |
266 {GDK_KP_Left, 'k', 'l'}, | |
267 {GDK_KP_Right, 'k', 'r'}, | |
268 {GDK_KP_Up, 'k', 'u'}, | |
269 {GDK_KP_Down, 'k', 'd'}, | |
270 {GDK_KP_Insert, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KINS}, | |
271 {GDK_KP_Delete, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KDEL}, | |
272 {GDK_KP_Home, 'K', '1'}, | |
273 {GDK_KP_End, 'K', '4'}, | |
274 {GDK_KP_Prior, 'K', '3'}, /* page up */ | |
275 {GDK_KP_Next, 'K', '5'}, /* page down */ | |
276 | |
277 {GDK_KP_Add, 'K', '6'}, | |
278 {GDK_KP_Subtract, 'K', '7'}, | |
279 {GDK_KP_Divide, 'K', '8'}, | |
280 {GDK_KP_Multiply, 'K', '9'}, | |
281 {GDK_KP_Enter, 'K', 'A'}, | |
282 {GDK_KP_Decimal, 'K', 'B'}, | |
283 | |
284 {GDK_KP_0, 'K', 'C'}, | |
285 {GDK_KP_1, 'K', 'D'}, | |
286 {GDK_KP_2, 'K', 'E'}, | |
287 {GDK_KP_3, 'K', 'F'}, | |
288 {GDK_KP_4, 'K', 'G'}, | |
289 {GDK_KP_5, 'K', 'H'}, | |
290 {GDK_KP_6, 'K', 'I'}, | |
291 {GDK_KP_7, 'K', 'J'}, | |
292 {GDK_KP_8, 'K', 'K'}, | |
293 {GDK_KP_9, 'K', 'L'}, | |
294 | |
295 /* End of list marker: */ | |
296 {0, 0, 0} | |
297 }; | |
298 | |
299 /* | |
300 * Flags for command line options table below. | |
301 */ | |
302 #define ARG_FONT 1 | |
303 #define ARG_GEOMETRY 2 | |
304 #define ARG_REVERSE 3 | |
305 #define ARG_NOREVERSE 4 | |
306 #define ARG_BACKGROUND 5 | |
307 #define ARG_FOREGROUND 6 | |
308 #define ARG_ICONIC 7 | |
309 #define ARG_ROLE 8 | |
310 #define ARG_NETBEANS 9 | |
311 #define ARG_XRM 10 /* ignored */ | |
312 #define ARG_MENUFONT 11 /* ignored */ | |
313 #define ARG_INDEX_MASK 0x00ff | |
314 #define ARG_HAS_VALUE 0x0100 /* a value is expected after the argument */ | |
315 #define ARG_NEEDS_GUI 0x0200 /* need to initialize the GUI for this */ | |
316 #define ARG_FOR_GTK 0x0400 /* argument is handled by GTK+ or GNOME */ | |
317 #define ARG_COMPAT_LONG 0x0800 /* accept -foo but substitute with --foo */ | |
318 #define ARG_KEEP 0x1000 /* don't remove argument from argv[] */ | |
319 | |
320 /* | |
321 * This table holds all the X GUI command line options allowed. This includes | |
322 * the standard ones so that we can skip them when Vim is started without the | |
323 * GUI (but the GUI might start up later). | |
324 * | |
325 * When changing this, also update doc/gui_x11.txt and the usage message!!! | |
326 */ | |
327 typedef struct | |
328 { | |
329 const char *name; | |
330 unsigned int flags; | |
331 } | |
332 cmdline_option_T; | |
333 | |
334 static const cmdline_option_T cmdline_options[] = | |
335 { | |
336 /* We handle these options ourselves */ | |
337 {"-fn", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
338 {"-font", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
339 {"-geom", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
340 {"-geometry", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
341 {"-rv", ARG_REVERSE}, | |
342 {"-reverse", ARG_REVERSE}, | |
343 {"+rv", ARG_NOREVERSE}, | |
344 {"+reverse", ARG_NOREVERSE}, | |
345 {"-bg", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
346 {"-background", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
347 {"-fg", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
348 {"-foreground", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
349 {"-iconic", ARG_ICONIC}, | |
350 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
351 {"--role", ARG_ROLE|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
352 #endif | |
353 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
354 {"-nb", ARG_NETBEANS}, /* non-standard value format */ | |
355 {"-xrm", ARG_XRM|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
356 {"-mf", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
357 {"-menufont", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
358 #endif | |
359 #if 0 /* not implemented; these arguments don't make sense for GTK+ */ | |
360 {"-boldfont", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
361 {"-italicfont", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
362 {"-bw", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
363 {"-borderwidth", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
364 {"-sw", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
365 {"-scrollbarwidth", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
366 #endif | |
367 /* Arguments handled by GTK (and GNOME) internally. */ | |
368 {"--g-fatal-warnings", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
369 {"--gdk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
370 {"--gdk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
371 {"--gtk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
372 {"--gtk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
373 {"--gtk-module", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
374 {"--sync", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
375 {"--display", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
376 {"--name", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
377 {"--class", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
378 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
379 {"--screen", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
380 {"--gxid-host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
381 {"--gxid-port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
382 #else /* these don't seem to exist anymore */ | |
383 {"--no-xshm", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
384 {"--xim-preedit", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
385 {"--xim-status", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
386 {"--gxid_host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
387 {"--gxid_port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
388 #endif | |
389 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
390 {"--load-modules", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
391 {"--sm-client-id", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
392 {"--sm-config-prefix", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
393 {"--sm-disable", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
394 {"--oaf-ior-fd", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
395 {"--oaf-activate-iid", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
396 {"--oaf-private", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
397 {"--enable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
398 {"--disable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
399 {"--espeaker", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
400 {"-?", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
401 {"--help", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI|ARG_KEEP}, | |
402 {"--usage", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
403 # if 0 /* conflicts with Vim's own --version argument */ | |
404 {"--version", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
405 # endif | |
406 {"--disable-crash-dialog", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
407 #endif | |
408 {NULL, 0} | |
409 }; | |
410 | |
411 static int gui_argc = 0; | |
412 static char **gui_argv = NULL; | |
413 | |
414 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
415 static const char *role_argument = NULL; | |
416 #endif | |
417 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
418 static const char *restart_command = NULL; | |
1898 | 419 static char *abs_restart_command = NULL; |
7 | 420 #endif |
421 static int found_iconic_arg = FALSE; | |
422 | |
423 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
424 /* | |
425 * Can't use Gnome if --socketid given | |
426 */ | |
427 static int using_gnome = 0; | |
428 #else | |
429 # define using_gnome 0 | |
430 #endif | |
431 | |
432 /* | |
433 * Parse the GUI related command-line arguments. Any arguments used are | |
434 * deleted from argv, and *argc is decremented accordingly. This is called | |
435 * when vim is started, whether or not the GUI has been started. | |
436 */ | |
437 void | |
438 gui_mch_prepare(int *argc, char **argv) | |
439 { | |
440 const cmdline_option_T *option; | |
441 int i = 0; | |
442 int len = 0; | |
443 | |
444 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
445 /* | |
446 * Determine the command used to invoke Vim, to be passed as restart | |
447 * command to the session manager. If argv[0] contains any directory | |
448 * components try building an absolute path, otherwise leave it as is. | |
449 */ | |
450 restart_command = argv[0]; | |
451 | |
452 if (strchr(argv[0], G_DIR_SEPARATOR) != NULL) | |
453 { | |
454 char_u buf[MAXPATHL]; | |
455 | |
456 if (mch_FullName((char_u *)argv[0], buf, (int)sizeof(buf), TRUE) == OK) | |
1898 | 457 { |
458 abs_restart_command = (char *)vim_strsave(buf); | |
459 restart_command = abs_restart_command; | |
460 } | |
7 | 461 } |
462 #endif | |
463 | |
464 /* | |
465 * Move all the entries in argv which are relevant to GTK+ and GNOME | |
466 * into gui_argv. Freed later in gui_mch_init(). | |
467 */ | |
468 gui_argc = 0; | |
469 gui_argv = (char **)alloc((unsigned)((*argc + 1) * sizeof(char *))); | |
470 | |
471 g_return_if_fail(gui_argv != NULL); | |
472 | |
473 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i++]; | |
474 | |
475 while (i < *argc) | |
476 { | |
477 /* Don't waste CPU cycles on non-option arguments. */ | |
478 if (argv[i][0] != '-' && argv[i][0] != '+') | |
479 { | |
480 ++i; | |
481 continue; | |
482 } | |
483 | |
484 /* Look for argv[i] in cmdline_options[] table. */ | |
485 for (option = &cmdline_options[0]; option->name != NULL; ++option) | |
486 { | |
487 len = strlen(option->name); | |
488 | |
489 if (strncmp(argv[i], option->name, len) == 0) | |
490 { | |
491 if (argv[i][len] == '\0') | |
492 break; | |
493 /* allow --foo=bar style */ | |
494 if (argv[i][len] == '=' && (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE)) | |
495 break; | |
496 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
497 /* darn, -nb has non-standard syntax */ | |
498 if (vim_strchr((char_u *)":=", argv[i][len]) != NULL | |
499 && (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK) == ARG_NETBEANS) | |
500 break; | |
501 #endif | |
502 } | |
503 else if ((option->flags & ARG_COMPAT_LONG) | |
504 && strcmp(argv[i], option->name + 1) == 0) | |
505 { | |
506 /* Replace the standard X arguments "-name" and "-display" | |
507 * with their GNU-style long option counterparts. */ | |
508 argv[i] = (char *)option->name; | |
509 break; | |
510 } | |
511 } | |
512 if (option->name == NULL) /* no match */ | |
513 { | |
514 ++i; | |
515 continue; | |
516 } | |
517 | |
518 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK) | |
519 { | |
520 /* Move the argument into gui_argv, which | |
521 * will later be passed to gtk_init_check() */ | |
522 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i]; | |
523 } | |
524 else | |
525 { | |
526 char *value = NULL; | |
527 | |
528 /* Extract the option's value if there is one. | |
529 * Accept both "--foo bar" and "--foo=bar" style. */ | |
530 if (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE) | |
531 { | |
532 if (argv[i][len] == '=') | |
533 value = &argv[i][len + 1]; | |
534 else if (i + 1 < *argc && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0) | |
535 value = argv[i + 1]; | |
536 } | |
537 | |
538 /* Check for options handled by Vim itself */ | |
539 switch (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK) | |
540 { | |
541 case ARG_REVERSE: | |
542 found_reverse_arg = TRUE; | |
543 break; | |
544 case ARG_NOREVERSE: | |
545 found_reverse_arg = FALSE; | |
546 break; | |
547 case ARG_FONT: | |
548 font_argument = value; | |
549 break; | |
550 case ARG_GEOMETRY: | |
551 if (value != NULL) | |
552 gui.geom = vim_strsave((char_u *)value); | |
553 break; | |
554 case ARG_BACKGROUND: | |
555 background_argument = value; | |
556 break; | |
557 case ARG_FOREGROUND: | |
558 foreground_argument = value; | |
559 break; | |
560 case ARG_ICONIC: | |
561 found_iconic_arg = TRUE; | |
562 break; | |
563 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
564 case ARG_ROLE: | |
565 role_argument = value; /* used later in gui_mch_open() */ | |
566 break; | |
567 #endif | |
568 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
569 case ARG_NETBEANS: | |
570 gui.dofork = FALSE; /* don't fork() when starting GUI */ | |
571 netbeansArg = argv[i]; | |
572 break; | |
573 #endif | |
574 default: | |
575 break; | |
576 } | |
577 } | |
578 | |
579 /* These arguments make gnome_program_init() print a message and exit. | |
580 * Must start the GUI for this, otherwise ":gui" will exit later! */ | |
581 if (option->flags & ARG_NEEDS_GUI) | |
582 gui.starting = TRUE; | |
583 | |
584 if (option->flags & ARG_KEEP) | |
585 ++i; | |
586 else | |
587 { | |
588 /* Remove the flag from the argument vector. */ | |
589 if (--*argc > i) | |
590 { | |
591 int n_strip = 1; | |
592 | |
593 /* Move the argument's value as well, if there is one. */ | |
594 if ((option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE) | |
595 && argv[i][len] != '=' | |
596 && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0) | |
597 { | |
598 ++n_strip; | |
599 --*argc; | |
600 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK) | |
601 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i + 1]; | |
602 } | |
603 | |
604 if (*argc > i) | |
605 mch_memmove(&argv[i], &argv[i + n_strip], | |
606 (*argc - i) * sizeof(char *)); | |
607 } | |
608 argv[*argc] = NULL; | |
609 } | |
610 } | |
611 | |
612 gui_argv[gui_argc] = NULL; | |
613 } | |
614 | |
359 | 615 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO) |
616 void | |
617 gui_mch_free_all() | |
618 { | |
619 vim_free(gui_argv); | |
1898 | 620 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) |
621 vim_free(abs_restart_command); | |
622 #endif | |
359 | 623 } |
624 #endif | |
625 | |
7 | 626 /* |
627 * This should be maybe completely removed. | |
628 * Doesn't seem possible, since check_copy_area() relies on | |
629 * this information. --danielk | |
630 */ | |
631 static gint | |
1884 | 632 visibility_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
633 GdkEventVisibility *event, | |
634 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 635 { |
636 gui.visibility = event->state; | |
637 /* | |
638 * When we do an gdk_window_copy_area(), and the window is partially | |
639 * obscured, we want to receive an event to tell us whether it worked | |
640 * or not. | |
641 */ | |
642 if (gui.text_gc != NULL) | |
643 gdk_gc_set_exposures(gui.text_gc, | |
644 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
645 return FALSE; | |
646 } | |
647 | |
648 /* | |
649 * Redraw the corresponding portions of the screen. | |
650 */ | |
651 static gint | |
1884 | 652 expose_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
653 GdkEventExpose *event, | |
654 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 655 { |
656 /* Skip this when the GUI isn't set up yet, will redraw later. */ | |
657 if (gui.starting) | |
658 return FALSE; | |
659 | |
660 out_flush(); /* make sure all output has been processed */ | |
661 gui_redraw(event->area.x, event->area.y, | |
662 event->area.width, event->area.height); | |
663 | |
664 /* Clear the border areas if needed */ | |
665 if (event->area.x < FILL_X(0)) | |
666 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, FILL_X(0), 0); | |
667 if (event->area.y < FILL_Y(0)) | |
668 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, 0, FILL_Y(0)); | |
669 if (event->area.x > FILL_X(Columns)) | |
670 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, | |
671 FILL_X((int)Columns), 0, 0, 0); | |
672 if (event->area.y > FILL_Y(Rows)) | |
673 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, FILL_Y((int)Rows), 0, 0); | |
674 | |
675 return FALSE; | |
676 } | |
677 | |
678 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER | |
679 /* | |
680 * Handle changes to the "Comm" property | |
681 */ | |
682 static gint | |
1884 | 683 property_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
684 GdkEventProperty *event, | |
685 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 686 { |
687 if (event->type == GDK_PROPERTY_NOTIFY | |
688 && event->state == (int)GDK_PROPERTY_NEW_VALUE | |
689 && GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(event->window) == commWindow | |
690 && GET_X_ATOM(event->atom) == commProperty) | |
691 { | |
692 XEvent xev; | |
693 | |
694 /* Translate to XLib */ | |
695 xev.xproperty.type = PropertyNotify; | |
696 xev.xproperty.atom = commProperty; | |
697 xev.xproperty.window = commWindow; | |
698 xev.xproperty.state = PropertyNewValue; | |
699 serverEventProc(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(widget->window), &xev); | |
700 | |
701 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
702 gtk_main_quit(); | |
703 } | |
704 return FALSE; | |
705 } | |
706 #endif | |
707 | |
708 | |
709 /**************************************************************************** | |
710 * Focus handlers: | |
711 */ | |
712 | |
713 | |
714 /* | |
715 * This is a simple state machine: | |
716 * BLINK_NONE not blinking at all | |
717 * BLINK_OFF blinking, cursor is not shown | |
718 * BLINK_ON blinking, cursor is shown | |
719 */ | |
720 | |
721 #define BLINK_NONE 0 | |
722 #define BLINK_OFF 1 | |
723 #define BLINK_ON 2 | |
724 | |
725 static int blink_state = BLINK_NONE; | |
726 static long_u blink_waittime = 700; | |
727 static long_u blink_ontime = 400; | |
728 static long_u blink_offtime = 250; | |
729 static guint blink_timer = 0; | |
730 | |
731 void | |
732 gui_mch_set_blinking(long waittime, long on, long off) | |
733 { | |
734 blink_waittime = waittime; | |
735 blink_ontime = on; | |
736 blink_offtime = off; | |
737 } | |
738 | |
739 /* | |
740 * Stop the cursor blinking. Show the cursor if it wasn't shown. | |
741 */ | |
742 void | |
743 gui_mch_stop_blink(void) | |
744 { | |
745 if (blink_timer) | |
746 { | |
747 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer); | |
748 blink_timer = 0; | |
749 } | |
750 if (blink_state == BLINK_OFF) | |
751 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
752 blink_state = BLINK_NONE; | |
753 } | |
754 | |
755 static gint | |
1884 | 756 blink_cb(gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 757 { |
758 if (blink_state == BLINK_ON) | |
759 { | |
760 gui_undraw_cursor(); | |
761 blink_state = BLINK_OFF; | |
762 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_offtime, | |
763 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
764 } | |
765 else | |
766 { | |
767 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
768 blink_state = BLINK_ON; | |
769 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_ontime, | |
770 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
771 } | |
772 | |
773 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
774 } | |
775 | |
776 /* | |
777 * Start the cursor blinking. If it was already blinking, this restarts the | |
778 * waiting time and shows the cursor. | |
779 */ | |
780 void | |
781 gui_mch_start_blink(void) | |
782 { | |
783 if (blink_timer) | |
784 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer); | |
785 /* Only switch blinking on if none of the times is zero */ | |
786 if (blink_waittime && blink_ontime && blink_offtime && gui.in_focus) | |
787 { | |
788 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_waittime, | |
789 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
790 blink_state = BLINK_ON; | |
791 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
792 } | |
793 } | |
794 | |
795 static gint | |
1884 | 796 enter_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
797 GdkEventCrossing *event UNUSED, | |
798 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 799 { |
800 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE) | |
801 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
802 | |
803 /* make sure keyboard input goes there */ | |
804 if (gtk_socket_id == 0 || !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(gui.drawarea)) | |
805 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea); | |
806 | |
807 return FALSE; | |
808 } | |
809 | |
810 static gint | |
1884 | 811 leave_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
812 GdkEventCrossing *event UNUSED, | |
813 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 814 { |
815 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE) | |
816 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
817 | |
818 return FALSE; | |
819 } | |
820 | |
821 static gint | |
1884 | 822 focus_in_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
823 GdkEventFocus *event UNUSED, | |
824 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 825 { |
826 gui_focus_change(TRUE); | |
827 | |
828 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE) | |
829 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
830 | |
1380 | 831 /* make sure keyboard input goes to the draw area (if this is focus for a |
832 * window) */ | |
791 | 833 if (widget != gui.drawarea) |
856 | 834 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea); |
7 | 835 |
1380 | 836 /* make sure the input buffer is read */ |
837 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
838 gtk_main_quit(); | |
839 | |
7 | 840 return TRUE; |
841 } | |
842 | |
843 static gint | |
1884 | 844 focus_out_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
845 GdkEventFocus *event UNUSED, | |
846 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 847 { |
848 gui_focus_change(FALSE); | |
849 | |
850 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE) | |
851 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
852 | |
1380 | 853 /* make sure the input buffer is read */ |
854 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
855 gtk_main_quit(); | |
856 | |
7 | 857 return TRUE; |
858 } | |
859 | |
860 | |
861 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
862 /* | |
863 * Translate a GDK key value to UTF-8 independently of the current locale. | |
864 * The output is written to string, which must have room for at least 6 bytes | |
865 * plus the NUL terminator. Returns the length in bytes. | |
866 * | |
867 * This function is used in the GTK+ 2 GUI only. The GTK+ 1 code makes use | |
868 * of GdkEventKey::string instead. But event->string is evil; see here why: | |
869 * http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gdk/gdk-Event-Structures.html#GdkEventKey | |
870 */ | |
871 static int | |
872 keyval_to_string(unsigned int keyval, unsigned int state, char_u *string) | |
873 { | |
874 int len; | |
875 guint32 uc; | |
876 | |
877 uc = gdk_keyval_to_unicode(keyval); | |
878 if (uc != 0) | |
879 { | |
880 /* Check for CTRL-foo */ | |
881 if ((state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) && uc >= 0x20 && uc < 0x80) | |
882 { | |
883 /* These mappings look arbitrary at the first glance, but in fact | |
884 * resemble quite exactly the behaviour of the GTK+ 1.2 GUI on my | |
885 * machine. The only difference is BS vs. DEL for CTRL-8 (makes | |
886 * more sense and is consistent with usual terminal behaviour). */ | |
887 if (uc >= '@') | |
888 string[0] = uc & 0x1F; | |
889 else if (uc == '2') | |
890 string[0] = NUL; | |
891 else if (uc >= '3' && uc <= '7') | |
892 string[0] = uc ^ 0x28; | |
893 else if (uc == '8') | |
894 string[0] = BS; | |
895 else if (uc == '?') | |
896 string[0] = DEL; | |
897 else | |
898 string[0] = uc; | |
899 len = 1; | |
900 } | |
901 else | |
902 { | |
903 /* Translate a normal key to UTF-8. This doesn't work for dead | |
904 * keys of course, you _have_ to use an input method for that. */ | |
905 len = utf_char2bytes((int)uc, string); | |
906 } | |
907 } | |
908 else | |
909 { | |
910 /* Translate keys which are represented by ASCII control codes in Vim. | |
911 * There are only a few of those; most control keys are translated to | |
912 * special terminal-like control sequences. */ | |
913 len = 1; | |
914 switch (keyval) | |
915 { | |
916 case GDK_Tab: case GDK_KP_Tab: case GDK_ISO_Left_Tab: | |
917 string[0] = TAB; | |
918 break; | |
919 case GDK_Linefeed: | |
920 string[0] = NL; | |
921 break; | |
922 case GDK_Return: case GDK_ISO_Enter: case GDK_3270_Enter: | |
923 string[0] = CAR; | |
924 break; | |
925 case GDK_Escape: | |
926 string[0] = ESC; | |
927 break; | |
928 default: | |
929 len = 0; | |
930 break; | |
931 } | |
932 } | |
933 string[len] = NUL; | |
934 | |
935 return len; | |
936 } | |
937 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
938 | |
179 | 939 static int |
940 modifiers_gdk2vim(guint state) | |
941 { | |
942 int modifiers = 0; | |
943 | |
944 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK) | |
945 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_SHIFT; | |
946 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) | |
947 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_CTRL; | |
948 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
949 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_ALT; | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
950 #ifdef GDK_SUPER_MASK |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
951 if (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
952 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_META; |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
953 #endif |
179 | 954 if (state & GDK_MOD4_MASK) |
955 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_META; | |
956 | |
957 return modifiers; | |
958 } | |
959 | |
960 static int | |
961 modifiers_gdk2mouse(guint state) | |
962 { | |
963 int modifiers = 0; | |
964 | |
965 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK) | |
966 modifiers |= MOUSE_SHIFT; | |
967 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) | |
968 modifiers |= MOUSE_CTRL; | |
969 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
970 modifiers |= MOUSE_ALT; | |
971 | |
972 return modifiers; | |
973 } | |
974 | |
7 | 975 /* |
976 * Main keyboard handler: | |
977 */ | |
978 static gint | |
1884 | 979 key_press_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
980 GdkEventKey *event, | |
981 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 982 { |
983 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
984 /* 256 bytes is way over the top, but for safety let's reduce it only | |
985 * for GTK+ 2 where we know for sure how large the string might get. | |
986 * (That is, up to 6 bytes + NUL + CSI escapes + safety measure.) */ | |
987 char_u string[32], string2[32]; | |
988 #else | |
989 char_u string[256], string2[256]; | |
990 #endif | |
991 guint key_sym; | |
992 int len; | |
993 int i; | |
994 int modifiers; | |
995 int key; | |
996 guint state; | |
997 char_u *s, *d; | |
998 | |
999 key_sym = event->keyval; | |
1000 state = event->state; | |
1001 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* deprecated */ | |
1002 len = event->length; | |
1003 g_assert(len <= sizeof(string)); | |
1004 #endif | |
1005 | |
1006 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1007 /* | |
1008 * It appears as if we always want to consume a key-press (there currently | |
1009 * aren't any 'return FALSE's), so we always do this: when running in a | |
1010 * GtkPlug and not a window, we must prevent emission of the key_press | |
1011 * EVENT from continuing (which is 'beyond' the level of stopping mere | |
1012 * signals by returning FALSE), otherwise things like tab/cursor-keys are | |
1013 * processed by the GtkPlug default handler, which moves input focus away | |
1014 * from us! | |
1015 * Note: This should no longer be necessary with GTK+ 2. | |
1016 */ | |
1017 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
1018 gtk_signal_emit_stop_by_name(GTK_OBJECT(widget), "key_press_event"); | |
1019 #endif | |
1020 | |
1021 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
1022 if (xim_queue_key_press_event(event, TRUE)) | |
1023 return TRUE; | |
1024 #endif | |
1025 | |
1026 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
1027 if (key_sym == GDK_space && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)) | |
1028 { | |
1029 hangul_input_state_toggle(); | |
1030 return TRUE; | |
1031 } | |
1032 #endif | |
1033 | |
1034 #ifdef SunXK_F36 | |
1035 /* | |
1036 * These keys have bogus lookup strings, and trapping them here is | |
1037 * easier than trying to XRebindKeysym() on them with every possible | |
1038 * combination of modifiers. | |
1039 */ | |
1040 if (key_sym == SunXK_F36 || key_sym == SunXK_F37) | |
1041 len = 0; | |
1042 else | |
1043 #endif | |
1044 { | |
1045 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1046 len = keyval_to_string(key_sym, state, string2); | |
1047 | |
1048 /* Careful: convert_input() doesn't handle the NUL character. | |
1049 * No need to convert pure ASCII anyway, thus the len > 1 check. */ | |
1050 if (len > 1 && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1051 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2)); | |
1052 | |
1053 s = string2; | |
1054 #else | |
1055 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1056 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1057 { | |
1058 mch_memmove(string2, event->string, len); | |
1059 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2)); | |
1060 s = string2; | |
1061 } | |
1062 else | |
1063 # endif | |
1064 s = (char_u *)event->string; | |
1065 #endif | |
1066 | |
1067 d = string; | |
1068 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
1069 { | |
1070 *d++ = s[i]; | |
1071 if (d[-1] == CSI && d + 2 < string + sizeof(string)) | |
1072 { | |
1073 /* Turn CSI into K_CSI. */ | |
1074 *d++ = KS_EXTRA; | |
1075 *d++ = (int)KE_CSI; | |
1076 } | |
1077 } | |
1078 len = d - string; | |
1079 } | |
1080 | |
1081 /* Shift-Tab results in Left_Tab, but we want <S-Tab> */ | |
1082 if (key_sym == GDK_ISO_Left_Tab) | |
1083 { | |
1084 key_sym = GDK_Tab; | |
1085 state |= GDK_SHIFT_MASK; | |
1086 } | |
1087 | |
1088 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* for GTK+ 2, we handle this in keyval_to_string() */ | |
1089 if ((key_sym == GDK_2 || key_sym == GDK_at) && (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)) | |
1090 { | |
1091 string[0] = NUL; /* CTRL-2 and CTRL-@ is NUL */ | |
1092 len = 1; | |
1093 } | |
1094 else if (len == 0 && (key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab)) | |
1095 { | |
1096 /* When there are modifiers, these keys get zero length; we need the | |
1097 * original key here to be able to add a modifier below. */ | |
1098 string[0] = (key_sym & 0xff); | |
1099 len = 1; | |
1100 } | |
1101 #endif | |
1102 | |
1103 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
1104 /* If there is a menu and 'wak' is "yes", or 'wak' is "menu" and the key | |
1105 * is a menu shortcut, we ignore everything with the ALT modifier. */ | |
1106 if ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
1107 && gui.menu_is_active | |
1108 && (*p_wak == 'y' | |
1109 || (*p_wak == 'm' | |
1110 && len == 1 | |
1111 && gui_is_menu_shortcut(string[0])))) | |
1112 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1113 /* For GTK2 we return false to signify that we haven't handled the | |
1114 * keypress, so that gtk will handle the mnemonic or accelerator. */ | |
1115 return FALSE; | |
1116 # else | |
1117 return TRUE; | |
1118 # endif | |
1119 #endif | |
1120 | |
1121 /* Check for Alt/Meta key (Mod1Mask), but not for a BS, DEL or character | |
1122 * that already has the 8th bit set. | |
1123 * Don't do this for <S-M-Tab>, that should become K_S_TAB with ALT. | |
1124 * Don't do this for double-byte encodings, it turns the char into a lead | |
1125 * byte. */ | |
1126 if (len == 1 | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1127 && ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1128 #ifdef GDK_SUPER_MASK |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1129 || (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1130 #endif |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1131 ) |
7 | 1132 && !(key_sym == GDK_BackSpace || key_sym == GDK_Delete) |
1133 && (string[0] & 0x80) == 0 | |
1134 && !(key_sym == GDK_Tab && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)) | |
1135 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1136 && !enc_dbcs | |
1137 #endif | |
1138 ) | |
1139 { | |
1140 string[0] |= 0x80; | |
1141 state &= ~GDK_MOD1_MASK; /* don't use it again */ | |
1142 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1143 if (enc_utf8) /* convert to utf-8 */ | |
1144 { | |
1145 string[1] = string[0] & 0xbf; | |
1146 string[0] = ((unsigned)string[0] >> 6) + 0xc0; | |
1147 if (string[1] == CSI) | |
1148 { | |
1149 string[2] = KS_EXTRA; | |
1150 string[3] = (int)KE_CSI; | |
1151 len = 4; | |
1152 } | |
1153 else | |
1154 len = 2; | |
1155 } | |
1156 #endif | |
1157 } | |
1158 | |
1159 /* Check for special keys. Also do this when len == 1 (key has an ASCII | |
1160 * value) to detect backspace, delete and keypad keys. */ | |
1161 if (len == 0 || len == 1) | |
1162 { | |
1163 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++) | |
1164 { | |
1165 if (special_keys[i].key_sym == key_sym) | |
1166 { | |
1167 string[0] = CSI; | |
1168 string[1] = special_keys[i].code0; | |
1169 string[2] = special_keys[i].code1; | |
1170 len = -3; | |
1171 break; | |
1172 } | |
1173 } | |
1174 } | |
1175 | |
1176 if (len == 0) /* Unrecognized key */ | |
1177 return TRUE; | |
1178 | |
1179 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && !defined(HAVE_GTK2) | |
1180 /* Cancel or type backspace. For GTK2, im_commit_cb() does the same. */ | |
1181 preedit_start_col = MAXCOL; | |
1182 xim_changed_while_preediting = TRUE; | |
1183 #endif | |
1184 | |
1185 /* Special keys (and a few others) may have modifiers. Also when using a | |
1186 * double-byte encoding (can't set the 8th bit). */ | |
1187 if (len == -3 || key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab | |
1188 || key_sym == GDK_Return || key_sym == GDK_Linefeed | |
1189 || key_sym == GDK_Escape || key_sym == GDK_KP_Tab | |
1190 || key_sym == GDK_ISO_Enter || key_sym == GDK_3270_Enter | |
1191 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1192 || (enc_dbcs && len == 1 && ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1193 # ifdef GDK_SUPER_MASK |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1194 || (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1195 # endif |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1196 )) |
7 | 1197 #endif |
1198 ) | |
1199 { | |
179 | 1200 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2vim(state); |
7 | 1201 |
1202 /* | |
1203 * For some keys a shift modifier is translated into another key | |
1204 * code. | |
1205 */ | |
1206 if (len == -3) | |
1207 key = TO_SPECIAL(string[1], string[2]); | |
1208 else | |
1209 key = string[0]; | |
1210 | |
1211 key = simplify_key(key, &modifiers); | |
1212 if (key == CSI) | |
1213 key = K_CSI; | |
1214 if (IS_SPECIAL(key)) | |
1215 { | |
1216 string[0] = CSI; | |
1217 string[1] = K_SECOND(key); | |
1218 string[2] = K_THIRD(key); | |
1219 len = 3; | |
1220 } | |
1221 else | |
1222 { | |
1223 string[0] = key; | |
1224 len = 1; | |
1225 } | |
1226 | |
1227 if (modifiers != 0) | |
1228 { | |
1229 string2[0] = CSI; | |
1230 string2[1] = KS_MODIFIER; | |
1231 string2[2] = modifiers; | |
1232 add_to_input_buf(string2, 3); | |
1233 } | |
1234 } | |
1235 | |
1236 if (len == 1 && ((string[0] == Ctrl_C && ctrl_c_interrupts) | |
1237 || (string[0] == intr_char && intr_char != Ctrl_C))) | |
1238 { | |
1239 trash_input_buf(); | |
1240 got_int = TRUE; | |
1241 } | |
1242 | |
1243 add_to_input_buf(string, len); | |
1244 | |
1245 /* blank out the pointer if necessary */ | |
1246 if (p_mh) | |
1247 gui_mch_mousehide(TRUE); | |
1248 | |
1249 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1250 gtk_main_quit(); | |
1251 | |
1252 return TRUE; | |
1253 } | |
1254 | |
1255 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) | |
1256 static gboolean | |
1884 | 1257 key_release_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
1258 GdkEventKey *event, | |
1259 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1260 { |
1261 /* | |
1262 * GTK+ 2 input methods may do fancy stuff on key release events too. | |
1263 * With the default IM for instance, you can enter any UCS code point | |
1264 * by holding down CTRL-SHIFT and typing hexadecimal digits. | |
1265 */ | |
1266 return xim_queue_key_press_event(event, FALSE); | |
1267 } | |
1268 #endif | |
1269 | |
1270 | |
1271 /**************************************************************************** | |
1272 * Selection handlers: | |
1273 */ | |
1274 | |
1275 static gint | |
1884 | 1276 selection_clear_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
7 | 1277 GdkEventSelection *event, |
1884 | 1278 gpointer user_data UNUSED) |
7 | 1279 { |
1280 if (event->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
1281 clip_lose_selection(&clip_plus); | |
1282 else | |
1283 clip_lose_selection(&clip_star); | |
1284 | |
1285 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1286 gtk_main_quit(); | |
1287 | |
1288 return TRUE; | |
1289 } | |
1290 | |
1291 #define RS_NONE 0 /* selection_received_cb() not called yet */ | |
1292 #define RS_OK 1 /* selection_received_cb() called and OK */ | |
1293 #define RS_FAIL 2 /* selection_received_cb() called and failed */ | |
1294 static int received_selection = RS_NONE; | |
1295 | |
1296 static void | |
1884 | 1297 selection_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
7 | 1298 GtkSelectionData *data, |
1884 | 1299 guint time_ UNUSED, |
1300 gpointer user_data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1301 { |
1302 VimClipboard *cbd; | |
1303 char_u *text; | |
1304 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL; | |
1305 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1306 guchar *tmpbuf_utf8 = NULL; | |
1307 #endif | |
1308 int len; | |
1309 int motion_type; | |
1310 | |
1311 if (data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
1312 cbd = &clip_plus; | |
1313 else | |
1314 cbd = &clip_star; | |
1315 | |
1316 text = (char_u *)data->data; | |
1317 len = data->length; | |
1318 motion_type = MCHAR; | |
1319 | |
1320 if (text == NULL || len <= 0) | |
1321 { | |
1322 received_selection = RS_FAIL; | |
1323 /* clip_free_selection(cbd); ??? */ | |
1324 | |
1325 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1326 gtk_main_quit(); | |
1327 | |
1328 return; | |
1329 } | |
1330 | |
1331 if (data->type == vim_atom) | |
1332 { | |
1333 motion_type = *text++; | |
1334 --len; | |
1335 } | |
1336 | |
1337 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1338 else if (data->type == vimenc_atom) | |
1339 { | |
1340 char_u *enc; | |
1341 vimconv_T conv; | |
1342 | |
1343 motion_type = *text++; | |
1344 --len; | |
1345 | |
1346 enc = text; | |
1347 text += STRLEN(text) + 1; | |
1348 len -= text - enc; | |
1349 | |
1350 /* If the encoding of the text is different from 'encoding', attempt | |
1351 * converting it. */ | |
1352 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
1353 convert_setup(&conv, enc, p_enc); | |
1354 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1355 { | |
1356 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
1357 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1358 text = tmpbuf; | |
1359 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
1360 } | |
1361 } | |
1362 #endif | |
1363 | |
1364 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1365 /* gtk_selection_data_get_text() handles all the nasty details | |
1366 * and targets and encodings etc. This rocks so hard. */ | |
1367 else | |
1368 { | |
1369 tmpbuf_utf8 = gtk_selection_data_get_text(data); | |
1370 if (tmpbuf_utf8 != NULL) | |
1371 { | |
1372 len = STRLEN(tmpbuf_utf8); | |
1373 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1374 { | |
1375 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, tmpbuf_utf8, &len); | |
1376 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1377 text = tmpbuf; | |
1378 } | |
1379 else | |
1380 text = tmpbuf_utf8; | |
1381 } | |
1904 | 1382 else if (len >= 2 && text[0] == 0xff && text[1] == 0xfe) |
1383 { | |
1384 vimconv_T conv; | |
1385 | |
1386 /* UTF-16, we get this for HTML */ | |
1387 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
1388 convert_setup_ext(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-16le", FALSE, p_enc, TRUE); | |
1389 | |
1390 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1391 { | |
1392 text += 2; | |
1393 len -= 2; | |
1394 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
1395 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
1396 } | |
1397 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1398 text = tmpbuf; | |
1399 } | |
7 | 1400 } |
1401 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
1402 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1403 else if (data->type == utf8_string_atom) | |
1404 { | |
1405 vimconv_T conv; | |
1406 | |
1407 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
1408 convert_setup(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-8", p_enc); | |
1409 | |
1410 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1411 { | |
1412 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
1413 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
1414 } | |
1415 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1416 text = tmpbuf; | |
1417 } | |
1418 # endif | |
1419 else if (data->type == compound_text_atom || data->type == text_atom) | |
1420 { | |
1421 char **list = NULL; | |
1422 int count; | |
1423 int i; | |
1424 unsigned tmplen = 0; | |
1425 | |
1426 count = gdk_text_property_to_text_list(data->type, data->format, | |
1427 data->data, data->length, | |
1428 &list); | |
1429 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i) | |
1430 tmplen += strlen(list[i]); | |
1431 | |
1432 tmpbuf = alloc(tmplen + 1); | |
1433 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1434 { | |
1435 tmpbuf[0] = NUL; | |
1436 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i) | |
1437 STRCAT(tmpbuf, list[i]); | |
1438 text = tmpbuf; | |
1439 len = tmplen; | |
1440 } | |
1441 | |
1442 if (list != NULL) | |
1443 gdk_free_text_list(list); | |
1444 } | |
1445 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
1446 | |
1447 clip_yank_selection(motion_type, text, (long)len, cbd); | |
1448 received_selection = RS_OK; | |
1449 vim_free(tmpbuf); | |
1450 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1451 g_free(tmpbuf_utf8); | |
1452 #endif | |
1453 | |
1454 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1455 gtk_main_quit(); | |
1456 } | |
1457 | |
1458 /* | |
1459 * Prepare our selection data for passing it to the external selection | |
1460 * client. | |
1461 */ | |
1462 static void | |
1884 | 1463 selection_get_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
7 | 1464 GtkSelectionData *selection_data, |
1465 guint info, | |
1884 | 1466 guint time_ UNUSED, |
1467 gpointer user_data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1468 { |
1469 char_u *string; | |
1470 char_u *tmpbuf; | |
1471 long_u tmplen; | |
1472 int length; | |
1473 int motion_type; | |
1474 GdkAtom type; | |
1475 VimClipboard *cbd; | |
1476 | |
1477 if (selection_data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
1478 cbd = &clip_plus; | |
1479 else | |
1480 cbd = &clip_star; | |
1481 | |
1482 if (!cbd->owned) | |
1483 return; /* Shouldn't ever happen */ | |
1484 | |
1485 if (info != (guint)TARGET_STRING | |
1486 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 1487 && (!clip_html || info != (guint)TARGET_HTML) |
7 | 1488 && info != (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING |
1489 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIMENC | |
1490 #endif | |
1491 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIM | |
1492 && info != (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT | |
1493 && info != (guint)TARGET_TEXT) | |
1494 return; | |
1495 | |
1496 /* get the selection from the '*'/'+' register */ | |
1497 clip_get_selection(cbd); | |
1498 | |
1499 motion_type = clip_convert_selection(&string, &tmplen, cbd); | |
1500 if (motion_type < 0 || string == NULL) | |
1501 return; | |
1502 /* Due to int arguments we can't handle more than G_MAXINT. Also | |
1503 * reserve one extra byte for NUL or the motion type; just in case. | |
1504 * (Not that pasting 2G of text is ever going to work, but... ;-) */ | |
1505 length = MIN(tmplen, (long_u)(G_MAXINT - 1)); | |
1506 | |
1507 if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIM) | |
1508 { | |
1509 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + 1); | |
1510 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1511 { | |
1512 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type; | |
1513 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + 1, string, (size_t)length); | |
1514 } | |
1515 /* For our own format, the first byte contains the motion type */ | |
1516 ++length; | |
1517 vim_free(string); | |
1518 string = tmpbuf; | |
1519 type = vim_atom; | |
1520 } | |
1521 | |
1522 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 1523 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_HTML) |
1524 { | |
1525 vimconv_T conv; | |
1526 | |
1527 /* Since we get utf-16, we probably should set it as well. */ | |
1528 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
1529 convert_setup_ext(&conv, p_enc, TRUE, (char_u *)"utf-16le", FALSE); | |
1530 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1531 { | |
1532 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, string, &length); | |
1533 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
1534 vim_free(string); | |
1535 string = tmpbuf; | |
1536 } | |
1537 | |
1538 /* Prepend the BOM: "fffe" */ | |
1539 if (string != NULL) | |
1540 { | |
1541 tmpbuf = alloc(length + 2); | |
1542 tmpbuf[0] = 0xff; | |
1543 tmpbuf[1] = 0xfe; | |
1544 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + 2, string, (size_t)length); | |
1545 vim_free(string); | |
1546 string = tmpbuf; | |
1547 length += 2; | |
1548 | |
1549 selection_data->type = selection_data->target; | |
1550 selection_data->format = 16; /* 16 bits per char */ | |
1551 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, html_atom, 16, | |
1552 string, length); | |
1553 vim_free(string); | |
1554 } | |
1555 return; | |
1556 } | |
7 | 1557 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIMENC) |
1558 { | |
1559 int l = STRLEN(p_enc); | |
1560 | |
1561 /* contents: motion_type 'encoding' NUL text */ | |
1562 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + l + 2); | |
1563 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1564 { | |
1565 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type; | |
1566 STRCPY(tmpbuf + 1, p_enc); | |
1567 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + l + 2, string, (size_t)length); | |
1568 } | |
1569 length += l + 2; | |
1570 vim_free(string); | |
1571 string = tmpbuf; | |
1572 type = vimenc_atom; | |
1573 } | |
1574 #endif | |
1575 | |
1576 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1577 /* gtk_selection_data_set_text() handles everything for us. This is | |
1578 * so easy and simple and cool, it'd be insane not to use it. */ | |
1579 else | |
1580 { | |
1581 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1582 { | |
1583 tmpbuf = string_convert(&output_conv, string, &length); | |
1584 vim_free(string); | |
1585 if (tmpbuf == NULL) | |
1586 return; | |
1587 string = tmpbuf; | |
1588 } | |
1589 /* Validate the string to avoid runtime warnings */ | |
1590 if (g_utf8_validate((const char *)string, (gssize)length, NULL)) | |
1591 { | |
1592 gtk_selection_data_set_text(selection_data, | |
1593 (const char *)string, length); | |
1594 } | |
1595 vim_free(string); | |
1596 return; | |
1597 } | |
1598 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
1599 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1600 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING) | |
1601 { | |
1602 vimconv_T conv; | |
1603 | |
1604 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
1605 convert_setup(&conv, p_enc, (char_u *)"utf-8"); | |
1606 | |
1607 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1608 { | |
1609 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, string, &length); | |
1610 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
1611 vim_free(string); | |
1612 string = tmpbuf; | |
1613 } | |
1614 type = utf8_string_atom; | |
1615 } | |
1616 # endif | |
1617 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT | |
1618 || info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT) | |
1619 { | |
1620 int format; | |
1621 | |
1622 /* Copy the string to ensure NUL-termination */ | |
1623 tmpbuf = vim_strnsave(string, length); | |
1624 vim_free(string); | |
1625 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1626 { | |
1627 gdk_string_to_compound_text((const char *)tmpbuf, | |
1628 &type, &format, &string, &length); | |
1629 vim_free(tmpbuf); | |
1630 selection_data->type = type; | |
1631 selection_data->format = format; | |
1632 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, format, string, length); | |
1633 gdk_free_compound_text(string); | |
1634 } | |
1635 return; | |
1636 } | |
1637 else | |
1638 { | |
1639 type = GDK_TARGET_STRING; | |
1640 } | |
1641 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
1642 | |
1643 if (string != NULL) | |
1644 { | |
1645 selection_data->type = selection_data->target; | |
1646 selection_data->format = 8; /* 8 bits per char */ | |
1647 | |
1648 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, 8, string, length); | |
1649 vim_free(string); | |
1650 } | |
1651 } | |
1652 | |
1653 /* | |
1654 * Check if the GUI can be started. Called before gvimrc is sourced. | |
1655 * Return OK or FAIL. | |
1656 */ | |
1657 int | |
1658 gui_mch_init_check(void) | |
1659 { | |
1660 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1226 | 1661 /* This is needed to make the locale handling consistent between the GUI |
7 | 1662 * and the rest of VIM. */ |
1663 gtk_set_locale(); | |
1664 #endif | |
1665 | |
1666 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
1667 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
1668 using_gnome = 1; | |
1669 #endif | |
1670 | |
1671 /* Don't use gtk_init() or gnome_init(), it exits on failure. */ | |
1672 if (!gtk_init_check(&gui_argc, &gui_argv)) | |
1673 { | |
1674 gui.dying = TRUE; | |
1666 | 1675 EMSG(_((char *)e_opendisp)); |
7 | 1676 return FAIL; |
1677 } | |
1678 | |
1679 return OK; | |
1680 } | |
1681 | |
1682 | |
1683 /**************************************************************************** | |
1684 * Mouse handling callbacks | |
1685 */ | |
1686 | |
1687 | |
1688 static guint mouse_click_timer = 0; | |
1689 static int mouse_timed_out = TRUE; | |
1690 | |
1691 /* | |
1692 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button | |
1693 */ | |
1694 static gint | |
1695 mouse_click_timer_cb(gpointer data) | |
1696 { | |
1697 /* we don't use this information currently */ | |
1698 int *timed_out = (int *) data; | |
1699 | |
1700 *timed_out = TRUE; | |
1701 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
1702 } | |
1703 | |
1704 static guint motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
1705 static int motion_repeat_offset = FALSE; | |
1706 static gint motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer); | |
1707 | |
1708 static void | |
1709 process_motion_notify(int x, int y, GdkModifierType state) | |
1710 { | |
1711 int button; | |
1712 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
1713 | |
1714 button = (state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK | | |
1715 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK | | |
1716 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK)) | |
1717 ? MOUSE_DRAG : ' '; | |
1718 | |
1719 /* If our pointer is currently hidden, then we should show it. */ | |
1720 gui_mch_mousehide(FALSE); | |
1721 | |
1722 /* Just moving the rodent above the drawing area without any button | |
1723 * being pressed. */ | |
1724 if (button != MOUSE_DRAG) | |
1725 { | |
1726 gui_mouse_moved(x, y); | |
1727 return; | |
1728 } | |
1729 | |
1730 /* translate modifier coding between the main engine and GTK */ | |
179 | 1731 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state); |
7 | 1732 |
1226 | 1733 /* inform the editor engine about the occurrence of this event */ |
7 | 1734 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers); |
1735 | |
1736 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1737 gtk_main_quit(); | |
1738 | |
1739 /* | |
1740 * Auto repeat timer handling. | |
1741 */ | |
1742 if (x < 0 || y < 0 | |
1743 || x >= gui.drawarea->allocation.width | |
1744 || y >= gui.drawarea->allocation.height) | |
1745 { | |
1746 | |
1747 int dx; | |
1748 int dy; | |
1749 int offshoot; | |
1750 int delay = 10; | |
1751 | |
1752 /* Calculate the maximal distance of the cursor from the drawing area. | |
1753 * (offshoot can't become negative here!). | |
1754 */ | |
1755 dx = x < 0 ? -x : x - gui.drawarea->allocation.width; | |
1756 dy = y < 0 ? -y : y - gui.drawarea->allocation.height; | |
1757 | |
1758 offshoot = dx > dy ? dx : dy; | |
1759 | |
1884 | 1760 /* Make a linearly decaying timer delay with a threshold of 5 at a |
7 | 1761 * distance of 127 pixels from the main window. |
1762 * | |
1763 * One could think endlessly about the most ergonomic variant here. | |
1764 * For example it could make sense to calculate the distance from the | |
1765 * drags start instead... | |
1766 * | |
1767 * Maybe a parabolic interpolation would suite us better here too... | |
1768 */ | |
1769 if (offshoot > 127) | |
1770 { | |
1771 /* 5 appears to be somehow near to my perceptual limits :-). */ | |
1772 delay = 5; | |
1773 } | |
1774 else | |
1775 { | |
1776 delay = (130 * (127 - offshoot)) / 127 + 5; | |
1777 } | |
1778 | |
1779 /* shoot again */ | |
1780 if (!motion_repeat_timer) | |
1781 motion_repeat_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)delay, | |
1782 motion_repeat_timer_cb, NULL); | |
1783 } | |
1784 } | |
1785 | |
1786 /* | |
1787 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button. | |
1788 */ | |
1789 static gint | |
1884 | 1790 motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 1791 { |
1792 int x; | |
1793 int y; | |
1794 GdkModifierType state; | |
1795 | |
1796 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, &x, &y, &state); | |
1797 | |
1798 if (!(state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK | | |
1799 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK | | |
1800 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK))) | |
1801 { | |
1802 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
1803 return FALSE; | |
1804 } | |
1805 | |
1806 /* If there already is a mouse click in the input buffer, wait another | |
1807 * time (otherwise we would create a backlog of clicks) */ | |
1808 if (vim_used_in_input_buf() > 10) | |
1809 return TRUE; | |
1810 | |
1811 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
1812 | |
1813 /* | |
1814 * Fake a motion event. | |
1815 * Trick: Pretend the mouse moved to the next character on every other | |
1816 * event, otherwise drag events will be discarded, because they are still | |
1817 * in the same character. | |
1818 */ | |
1819 if (motion_repeat_offset) | |
1820 x += gui.char_width; | |
1821 | |
1822 motion_repeat_offset = !motion_repeat_offset; | |
1823 process_motion_notify(x, y, state); | |
1824 | |
1825 /* Don't happen again. We will get reinstalled in the synthetic event | |
1826 * if needed -- thus repeating should still work. */ | |
1827 return FALSE; | |
1828 } | |
1829 | |
1830 static gint | |
1884 | 1831 motion_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
1832 GdkEventMotion *event, | |
1833 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1834 { |
1835 if (event->is_hint) | |
1836 { | |
1837 int x; | |
1838 int y; | |
1839 GdkModifierType state; | |
1840 | |
1841 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, &x, &y, &state); | |
1842 process_motion_notify(x, y, state); | |
1843 } | |
1844 else | |
1845 { | |
1846 process_motion_notify((int)event->x, (int)event->y, | |
1847 (GdkModifierType)event->state); | |
1848 } | |
1849 | |
1850 return TRUE; /* handled */ | |
1851 } | |
1852 | |
1853 | |
1854 /* | |
1855 * Mouse button handling. Note please that we are capturing multiple click's | |
1856 * by our own timeout mechanism instead of the one provided by GTK+ itself. | |
1857 * This is due to the way the generic VIM code is recognizing multiple clicks. | |
1858 */ | |
1859 static gint | |
1884 | 1860 button_press_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
1861 GdkEventButton *event, | |
1862 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1863 { |
1864 int button; | |
1865 int repeated_click = FALSE; | |
1866 int x, y; | |
1867 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
1868 | |
1869 /* Make sure we have focus now we've been selected */ | |
1870 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget)) | |
1871 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget); | |
1872 | |
1873 /* | |
1874 * Don't let additional events about multiple clicks send by GTK to us | |
1875 * after the initial button press event confuse us. | |
1876 */ | |
1877 if (event->type != GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) | |
1878 return FALSE; | |
1879 | |
1880 x = event->x; | |
1881 y = event->y; | |
1882 | |
1883 /* Handle multiple clicks */ | |
1884 if (!mouse_timed_out && mouse_click_timer) | |
1885 { | |
1886 gtk_timeout_remove(mouse_click_timer); | |
1887 mouse_click_timer = 0; | |
1888 repeated_click = TRUE; | |
1889 } | |
1890 | |
1891 mouse_timed_out = FALSE; | |
1892 mouse_click_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)p_mouset, | |
1893 mouse_click_timer_cb, &mouse_timed_out); | |
1894 | |
1895 switch (event->button) | |
1896 { | |
1897 case 1: | |
1898 button = MOUSE_LEFT; | |
1899 break; | |
1900 case 2: | |
1901 button = MOUSE_MIDDLE; | |
1902 break; | |
1903 case 3: | |
1904 button = MOUSE_RIGHT; | |
1905 break; | |
1906 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1907 case 4: | |
1908 button = MOUSE_4; | |
1909 break; | |
1910 case 5: | |
1911 button = MOUSE_5; | |
1912 break; | |
1913 #endif | |
1914 default: | |
1915 return FALSE; /* Unknown button */ | |
1916 } | |
1917 | |
1918 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
1919 /* cancel any preediting */ | |
1920 if (im_is_preediting()) | |
1921 xim_reset(); | |
1922 #endif | |
1923 | |
179 | 1924 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
7 | 1925 |
1926 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, repeated_click, vim_modifiers); | |
1927 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1928 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure the above will be handled immediately */ | |
1929 | |
1930 return TRUE; | |
1931 } | |
1932 | |
1933 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1934 /* | |
1935 * GTK+ 2 doesn't handle mouse buttons 4, 5, 6 and 7 the same way as GTK+ 1. | |
1936 * Instead, it abstracts scrolling via the new GdkEventScroll. | |
1937 */ | |
1938 static gboolean | |
1884 | 1939 scroll_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
1940 GdkEventScroll *event, | |
1941 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1942 { |
1943 int button; | |
179 | 1944 int_u vim_modifiers; |
7 | 1945 |
1946 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget)) | |
1947 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget); | |
1948 | |
1949 switch (event->direction) | |
1950 { | |
1951 case GDK_SCROLL_UP: | |
1952 button = MOUSE_4; | |
1953 break; | |
1954 case GDK_SCROLL_DOWN: | |
1955 button = MOUSE_5; | |
1956 break; | |
1957 default: /* We don't care about left and right... Yet. */ | |
1958 return FALSE; | |
1959 } | |
1960 | |
1961 # ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
1962 /* cancel any preediting */ | |
1963 if (im_is_preediting()) | |
1964 xim_reset(); | |
1965 # endif | |
1966 | |
179 | 1967 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
7 | 1968 |
1969 gui_send_mouse_event(button, (int)event->x, (int)event->y, | |
1970 FALSE, vim_modifiers); | |
1971 | |
1972 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1973 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure the above will be handled immediately */ | |
1974 | |
1975 return TRUE; | |
1976 } | |
1977 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
1978 | |
1979 | |
1980 static gint | |
1884 | 1981 button_release_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
1982 GdkEventButton *event, | |
1983 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1984 { |
1985 int x, y; | |
1986 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
1987 | |
1988 /* Remove any motion "machine gun" timers used for automatic further | |
1989 extension of allocation areas if outside of the applications window | |
1990 area .*/ | |
1991 if (motion_repeat_timer) | |
1992 { | |
1993 gtk_timeout_remove(motion_repeat_timer); | |
1994 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
1995 } | |
1996 | |
1997 x = event->x; | |
1998 y = event->y; | |
1999 | |
179 | 2000 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
7 | 2001 |
2002 gui_send_mouse_event(MOUSE_RELEASE, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers); | |
2003 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
2004 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure it will be handled immediately */ | |
2005 | |
2006 return TRUE; | |
2007 } | |
2008 | |
2009 | |
2010 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
2011 /**************************************************************************** | |
2012 * Drag aNd Drop support handlers. | |
2013 */ | |
2014 | |
2015 /* | |
2016 * Count how many items there may be and separate them with a NUL. | |
2017 * Apparently the items are separated with \r\n. This is not documented, | |
2018 * thus be careful not to go past the end. Also allow separation with | |
2019 * NUL characters. | |
2020 */ | |
2021 static int | |
2022 count_and_decode_uri_list(char_u *out, char_u *raw, int len) | |
2023 { | |
2024 int i; | |
2025 char_u *p = out; | |
2026 int count = 0; | |
2027 | |
2028 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
2029 { | |
2030 if (raw[i] == NUL || raw[i] == '\n' || raw[i] == '\r') | |
2031 { | |
2032 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL) | |
2033 { | |
2034 ++count; | |
2035 *p++ = NUL; | |
2036 } | |
2037 } | |
2038 else if (raw[i] == '%' && i + 2 < len && hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1) > 0) | |
2039 { | |
2040 *p++ = hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1); | |
2041 i += 2; | |
2042 } | |
2043 else | |
2044 *p++ = raw[i]; | |
2045 } | |
2046 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL) | |
2047 { | |
2048 *p = NUL; /* last item didn't have \r or \n */ | |
2049 ++count; | |
2050 } | |
2051 return count; | |
2052 } | |
2053 | |
2054 /* | |
2055 * Parse NUL separated "src" strings. Make it an array "outlist" form. On | |
2056 * this process, URI which protocol is not "file:" are removed. Return | |
2057 * length of array (less than "max"). | |
2058 */ | |
2059 static int | |
2060 filter_uri_list(char_u **outlist, int max, char_u *src) | |
2061 { | |
2062 int i, j; | |
2063 | |
2064 for (i = j = 0; i < max; ++i) | |
2065 { | |
2066 outlist[i] = NULL; | |
2067 if (STRNCMP(src, "file:", 5) == 0) | |
2068 { | |
2069 src += 5; | |
2070 if (STRNCMP(src, "//localhost", 11) == 0) | |
2071 src += 11; | |
2072 while (src[0] == '/' && src[1] == '/') | |
2073 ++src; | |
2074 outlist[j++] = vim_strsave(src); | |
2075 } | |
2076 src += STRLEN(src) + 1; | |
2077 } | |
2078 return j; | |
2079 } | |
2080 | |
2081 static char_u ** | |
2082 parse_uri_list(int *count, char_u *data, int len) | |
2083 { | |
2084 int n = 0; | |
2085 char_u *tmp = NULL; | |
2086 char_u **array = NULL;; | |
2087 | |
2088 if (data != NULL && len > 0 && (tmp = (char_u *)alloc(len + 1)) != NULL) | |
2089 { | |
2090 n = count_and_decode_uri_list(tmp, data, len); | |
2091 if (n > 0 && (array = (char_u **)alloc(n * sizeof(char_u *))) != NULL) | |
2092 n = filter_uri_list(array, n, tmp); | |
2093 } | |
2094 vim_free(tmp); | |
2095 *count = n; | |
2096 return array; | |
2097 } | |
2098 | |
2099 static void | |
2100 drag_handle_uri_list(GdkDragContext *context, | |
2101 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
2102 guint time_, | |
2103 GdkModifierType state, | |
2104 gint x, | |
2105 gint y) | |
2106 { | |
2107 char_u **fnames; | |
2108 int nfiles = 0; | |
2109 | |
2110 fnames = parse_uri_list(&nfiles, data->data, data->length); | |
2111 | |
2112 if (fnames != NULL && nfiles > 0) | |
2113 { | |
179 | 2114 int_u modifiers; |
7 | 2115 |
2116 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */ | |
2117 | |
179 | 2118 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state); |
7 | 2119 |
2120 gui_handle_drop(x, y, modifiers, fnames, nfiles); | |
2121 } | |
840 | 2122 else |
2123 vim_free(fnames); | |
7 | 2124 } |
2125 | |
2126 static void | |
2127 drag_handle_text(GdkDragContext *context, | |
2128 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
2129 guint time_, | |
2130 GdkModifierType state) | |
2131 { | |
2132 char_u dropkey[6] = {CSI, KS_MODIFIER, 0, CSI, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_DROP}; | |
2133 char_u *text; | |
2134 int len; | |
2135 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
2136 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL; | |
2137 # endif | |
2138 | |
2139 text = data->data; | |
2140 len = data->length; | |
2141 | |
2142 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
2143 if (data->type == utf8_string_atom) | |
2144 { | |
2145 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2146 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
2147 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, text, &len); | |
2148 # else | |
2149 vimconv_T conv; | |
2150 | |
2151 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
2152 convert_setup(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-8", p_enc); | |
2153 | |
2154 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
2155 { | |
2156 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
2157 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
2158 } | |
2159 # endif | |
2160 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
2161 text = tmpbuf; | |
2162 } | |
2163 # endif /* FEAT_MBYTE */ | |
2164 | |
2165 dnd_yank_drag_data(text, (long)len); | |
2166 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */ | |
2167 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
2168 vim_free(tmpbuf); | |
2169 # endif | |
2170 | |
179 | 2171 dropkey[2] = modifiers_gdk2vim(state); |
7 | 2172 |
2173 if (dropkey[2] != 0) | |
2174 add_to_input_buf(dropkey, (int)sizeof(dropkey)); | |
2175 else | |
2176 add_to_input_buf(dropkey + 3, (int)(sizeof(dropkey) - 3)); | |
2177 | |
2178 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
2179 gtk_main_quit(); | |
2180 } | |
2181 | |
2182 /* | |
2183 * DND receiver. | |
2184 */ | |
2185 static void | |
2186 drag_data_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget, | |
2187 GdkDragContext *context, | |
2188 gint x, | |
2189 gint y, | |
2190 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
2191 guint info, | |
2192 guint time_, | |
1884 | 2193 gpointer user_data UNUSED) |
7 | 2194 { |
2195 GdkModifierType state; | |
2196 | |
2197 /* Guard against trash */ | |
2198 if (data->data == NULL | |
2199 || data->length <= 0 | |
2200 || data->format != 8 | |
2201 || data->data[data->length] != '\0') | |
2202 { | |
2203 gtk_drag_finish(context, FALSE, FALSE, time_); | |
2204 return; | |
2205 } | |
2206 | |
2207 /* Get the current modifier state for proper distinguishment between | |
2208 * different operations later. */ | |
2209 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, NULL, NULL, &state); | |
2210 | |
2211 /* Not sure about the role of "text/plain" here... */ | |
2212 if (info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST) | |
2213 drag_handle_uri_list(context, data, time_, state, x, y); | |
2214 else | |
2215 drag_handle_text(context, data, time_, state); | |
2216 | |
2217 } | |
2218 #endif /* FEAT_DND */ | |
2219 | |
2220 | |
2221 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
2222 /* | |
2223 * GnomeClient interact callback. Check for unsaved buffers that cannot | |
2224 * be abandoned and pop up a dialog asking the user for confirmation if | |
2225 * necessary. | |
2226 */ | |
2227 static void | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2228 sm_client_check_changed_any(GnomeClient *client UNUSED, |
7 | 2229 gint key, |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2230 GnomeDialogType type UNUSED, |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2231 gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2232 { |
2233 cmdmod_T save_cmdmod; | |
2234 gboolean shutdown_cancelled; | |
2235 | |
2236 save_cmdmod = cmdmod; | |
2237 | |
2238 # ifdef FEAT_BROWSE | |
2239 cmdmod.browse = TRUE; | |
2240 # endif | |
2241 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_DIALOG) || defined(FEAT_CON_DIALOG) | |
2242 cmdmod.confirm = TRUE; | |
2243 # endif | |
2244 /* | |
2245 * If there are changed buffers, present the user with | |
2246 * a dialog if possible, otherwise give an error message. | |
2247 */ | |
2248 shutdown_cancelled = check_changed_any(FALSE); | |
2249 | |
2250 exiting = FALSE; | |
2251 cmdmod = save_cmdmod; | |
2252 setcursor(); /* position the cursor */ | |
2253 out_flush(); | |
2254 /* | |
2255 * If the user hit the [Cancel] button the whole shutdown | |
2256 * will be cancelled. Wow, quite powerful feature (: | |
2257 */ | |
2258 gnome_interaction_key_return(key, shutdown_cancelled); | |
2259 } | |
2260 | |
2261 /* | |
2262 * Generate a script that can be used to restore the current editing session. | |
2263 * Save the value of v:this_session before running :mksession in order to make | |
2264 * automagic session save fully transparent. Return TRUE on success. | |
2265 */ | |
2266 static int | |
2267 write_session_file(char_u *filename) | |
2268 { | |
2269 char_u *escaped_filename; | |
2270 char *mksession_cmdline; | |
2271 unsigned int save_ssop_flags; | |
2272 int failed; | |
2273 | |
2274 /* | |
2275 * Build an ex command line to create a script that restores the current | |
2276 * session if executed. Escape the filename to avoid nasty surprises. | |
2277 */ | |
2278 escaped_filename = vim_strsave_escaped(filename, escape_chars); | |
2279 if (escaped_filename == NULL) | |
2280 return FALSE; | |
1296 | 2281 mksession_cmdline = g_strconcat("mksession ", (char *)escaped_filename, |
2282 NULL); | |
7 | 2283 vim_free(escaped_filename); |
1296 | 2284 |
7 | 2285 /* |
2286 * Use a reasonable hardcoded set of 'sessionoptions' flags to avoid | |
2287 * unpredictable effects when the session is saved automatically. Also, | |
2288 * we definitely need SSOP_GLOBALS to be able to restore v:this_session. | |
2289 * Don't use SSOP_BUFFERS to prevent the buffer list from becoming | |
2290 * enormously large if the GNOME session feature is used regularly. | |
2291 */ | |
2292 save_ssop_flags = ssop_flags; | |
2293 ssop_flags = (SSOP_BLANK|SSOP_CURDIR|SSOP_FOLDS|SSOP_GLOBALS | |
1296 | 2294 |SSOP_HELP|SSOP_OPTIONS|SSOP_WINSIZE|SSOP_TABPAGES); |
7 | 2295 |
2296 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let Save_VV_this_session = v:this_session"); | |
2297 failed = (do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)mksession_cmdline) == FAIL); | |
2298 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session"); | |
150 | 2299 do_unlet((char_u *)"Save_VV_this_session", TRUE); |
7 | 2300 |
2301 ssop_flags = save_ssop_flags; | |
2302 g_free(mksession_cmdline); | |
2303 /* | |
2304 * Reopen the file and append a command to restore v:this_session, | |
2305 * as if this save never happened. This is to avoid conflicts with | |
2306 * the user's own sessions. FIXME: It's probably less hackish to add | |
2307 * a "stealth" flag to 'sessionoptions' -- gotta ask Bram. | |
2308 */ | |
2309 if (!failed) | |
2310 { | |
2311 FILE *fd; | |
2312 | |
2313 fd = open_exfile(filename, TRUE, APPENDBIN); | |
2314 | |
2315 failed = (fd == NULL | |
2316 || put_line(fd, "let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL | |
2317 || put_line(fd, "unlet Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL); | |
2318 | |
2319 if (fd != NULL && fclose(fd) != 0) | |
2320 failed = TRUE; | |
2321 | |
2322 if (failed) | |
2323 mch_remove(filename); | |
2324 } | |
2325 | |
2326 return !failed; | |
2327 } | |
2328 | |
2329 /* | |
2330 * "save_yourself" signal handler. Initiate an interaction to ask the user | |
2331 * for confirmation if necessary. Save the current editing session and tell | |
2332 * the session manager how to restart Vim. | |
2333 */ | |
2334 static gboolean | |
2335 sm_client_save_yourself(GnomeClient *client, | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2336 gint phase UNUSED, |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2337 GnomeSaveStyle save_style UNUSED, |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2338 gboolean shutdown UNUSED, |
7 | 2339 GnomeInteractStyle interact_style, |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2340 gboolean fast UNUSED, |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2341 gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2342 { |
2343 static const char suffix[] = "-session.vim"; | |
2344 char *session_file; | |
2345 unsigned int len; | |
2346 gboolean success; | |
2347 | |
2348 /* Always request an interaction if possible. check_changed_any() | |
2349 * won't actually show a dialog unless any buffers have been modified. | |
2350 * There doesn't seem to be an obvious way to check that without | |
2351 * automatically firing the dialog. Anyway, it works just fine. */ | |
2352 if (interact_style == GNOME_INTERACT_ANY) | |
2353 gnome_client_request_interaction(client, GNOME_DIALOG_NORMAL, | |
2354 &sm_client_check_changed_any, | |
2355 NULL); | |
2356 out_flush(); | |
2357 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ | |
2358 | |
2359 /* The path is unique for each session save. We do neither know nor care | |
2360 * which session script will actually be used later. This decision is in | |
2361 * the domain of the session manager. */ | |
2362 session_file = gnome_config_get_real_path( | |
2363 gnome_client_get_config_prefix(client)); | |
2364 len = strlen(session_file); | |
2365 | |
2366 if (len > 0 && session_file[len-1] == G_DIR_SEPARATOR) | |
2367 --len; /* get rid of the superfluous trailing '/' */ | |
2368 | |
2369 session_file = g_renew(char, session_file, len + sizeof(suffix)); | |
2370 memcpy(session_file + len, suffix, sizeof(suffix)); | |
2371 | |
2372 success = write_session_file((char_u *)session_file); | |
2373 | |
2374 if (success) | |
2375 { | |
2376 const char *argv[8]; | |
2377 int i; | |
2378 | |
2379 /* Tell the session manager how to wipe out the stored session data. | |
2380 * This isn't as dangerous as it looks, don't worry :) session_file | |
2381 * is a unique absolute filename. Usually it'll be something like | |
2382 * `/home/user/.gnome2/vim-XXXXXX-session.vim'. */ | |
2383 i = 0; | |
2384 argv[i++] = "rm"; | |
2385 argv[i++] = session_file; | |
2386 argv[i] = NULL; | |
2387 | |
2388 gnome_client_set_discard_command(client, i, (char **)argv); | |
2389 | |
2390 /* Tell the session manager how to restore the just saved session. | |
2391 * This is easily done thanks to Vim's -S option. Pass the -f flag | |
2392 * since there's no need to fork -- it might even cause confusion. | |
2393 * Also pass the window role to give the WM something to match on. | |
2394 * The role is set in gui_mch_open(), thus should _never_ be NULL. */ | |
2395 i = 0; | |
2396 argv[i++] = restart_command; | |
2397 argv[i++] = "-f"; | |
2398 argv[i++] = "-g"; | |
2399 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2400 argv[i++] = "--role"; | |
2401 argv[i++] = gtk_window_get_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
2402 # endif | |
2403 argv[i++] = "-S"; | |
2404 argv[i++] = session_file; | |
2405 argv[i] = NULL; | |
2406 | |
2407 gnome_client_set_restart_command(client, i, (char **)argv); | |
2408 gnome_client_set_clone_command(client, 0, NULL); | |
2409 } | |
2410 | |
2411 g_free(session_file); | |
2412 | |
2413 return success; | |
2414 } | |
2415 | |
2416 /* | |
2417 * Called when the session manager wants us to die. There isn't much to save | |
2418 * here since "save_yourself" has been emitted before (unless serious trouble | |
2419 * is happening). | |
2420 */ | |
2421 static void | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2422 sm_client_die(GnomeClient *client UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2423 { |
2424 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
2425 full_screen = FALSE; | |
2426 | |
1666 | 2427 vim_strncpy(IObuff, (char_u *) |
419 | 2428 _("Vim: Received \"die\" request from session manager\n"), |
1666 | 2429 IOSIZE - 1); |
7 | 2430 preserve_exit(); |
2431 } | |
2432 | |
2433 /* | |
2434 * Connect our signal handlers to be notified on session save and shutdown. | |
2435 */ | |
2436 static void | |
2437 setup_save_yourself(void) | |
2438 { | |
2439 GnomeClient *client; | |
2440 | |
2441 client = gnome_master_client(); | |
2442 | |
2443 if (client != NULL) | |
2444 { | |
2445 /* Must use the deprecated gtk_signal_connect() for compatibility | |
2446 * with GNOME 1. Arrgh, zombies! */ | |
2447 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "save_yourself", | |
2448 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_save_yourself), NULL); | |
2449 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "die", | |
2450 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_die), NULL); | |
2451 } | |
2452 } | |
2453 | |
2454 #else /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */ | |
2455 | |
2456 # ifdef USE_XSMP | |
2457 /* | |
2458 * GTK tells us that XSMP needs attention | |
2459 */ | |
2460 static gboolean | |
2461 local_xsmp_handle_requests(source, condition, data) | |
1884 | 2462 GIOChannel *source UNUSED; |
7 | 2463 GIOCondition condition; |
2464 gpointer data; | |
2465 { | |
2466 if (condition == G_IO_IN) | |
2467 { | |
2468 /* Do stuff; maybe close connection */ | |
2469 if (xsmp_handle_requests() == FAIL) | |
2470 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data); | |
2471 return TRUE; | |
2472 } | |
2473 /* Error */ | |
2474 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data); | |
2475 xsmp_close(); | |
2476 return TRUE; | |
2477 } | |
2478 # endif /* USE_XSMP */ | |
2479 | |
2480 /* | |
2481 * Setup the WM_PROTOCOLS to indicate we want the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event. | |
2482 * This is an ugly use of X functions. GTK doesn't offer an alternative. | |
2483 */ | |
2484 static void | |
2485 setup_save_yourself(void) | |
2486 { | |
2487 Atom *existing_atoms = NULL; | |
2488 int count = 0; | |
2489 | |
2490 #ifdef USE_XSMP | |
2491 if (xsmp_icefd != -1) | |
2492 { | |
2493 /* | |
2494 * Use XSMP is preference to legacy WM_SAVE_YOURSELF; | |
2495 * set up GTK IO monitor | |
2496 */ | |
2497 GIOChannel *g_io = g_io_channel_unix_new(xsmp_icefd); | |
2498 | |
2499 g_io_add_watch(g_io, G_IO_IN | G_IO_ERR | G_IO_HUP, | |
2500 local_xsmp_handle_requests, (gpointer)g_io); | |
2501 } | |
2502 else | |
2503 #endif | |
2504 { | |
2505 /* Fall back to old method */ | |
2506 | |
2507 /* first get the existing value */ | |
2508 if (XGetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2509 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2510 &existing_atoms, &count)) | |
2511 { | |
2512 Atom *new_atoms; | |
2513 Atom save_yourself_xatom; | |
2514 int i; | |
2515 | |
2516 save_yourself_xatom = GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom); | |
2517 | |
2518 /* check if WM_SAVE_YOURSELF isn't there yet */ | |
2519 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i) | |
2520 if (existing_atoms[i] == save_yourself_xatom) | |
2521 break; | |
2522 | |
2523 if (i == count) | |
2524 { | |
2525 /* allocate an Atoms array which is one item longer */ | |
2526 new_atoms = (Atom *)alloc((unsigned)((count + 1) | |
2527 * sizeof(Atom))); | |
2528 if (new_atoms != NULL) | |
2529 { | |
2530 memcpy(new_atoms, existing_atoms, count * sizeof(Atom)); | |
2531 new_atoms[count] = save_yourself_xatom; | |
2532 XSetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2533 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2534 new_atoms, count + 1); | |
2535 vim_free(new_atoms); | |
2536 } | |
2537 } | |
2538 XFree(existing_atoms); | |
2539 } | |
2540 } | |
2541 } | |
2542 | |
2543 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2544 /* | |
2545 * Installing a global event filter seems to be the only way to catch | |
2546 * client messages of type WM_PROTOCOLS without overriding GDK's own | |
2547 * client message event filter. Well, that's still better than trying | |
2548 * to guess what the GDK filter had done if it had been invoked instead | |
2549 * (This is what we did for GTK+ 1.2, see below). | |
2550 * | |
2551 * GTK2_FIXME: This doesn't seem to work. For some reason we never | |
2552 * receive WM_SAVE_YOURSELF even though everything is set up correctly. | |
2553 * I have the nasty feeling modern session managers just don't send this | |
2554 * deprecated message anymore. Addition: confirmed by several people. | |
2555 * | |
2556 * The GNOME session support is much cooler anyway. Unlike this ugly | |
2557 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF hack it actually stores the session... And yes, | |
2558 * it should work with KDE as well. | |
2559 */ | |
2560 static GdkFilterReturn | |
1884 | 2561 global_event_filter(GdkXEvent *xev, |
2562 GdkEvent *event UNUSED, | |
2563 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 2564 { |
2565 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev; | |
2566 | |
2567 if (xevent != NULL | |
2568 && xevent->type == ClientMessage | |
2569 && xevent->xclient.message_type == GET_X_ATOM(wm_protocols_atom) | |
1884 | 2570 && (long_u)xevent->xclient.data.l[0] |
2571 == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom)) | |
7 | 2572 { |
2573 out_flush(); | |
2574 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ | |
2575 /* | |
2576 * Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager | |
2577 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be | |
2578 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL. | |
2579 */ | |
2580 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2581 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2582 NULL, 0); | |
2583 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE; | |
2584 } | |
2585 | |
2586 return GDK_FILTER_CONTINUE; | |
2587 } | |
2588 | |
2589 # else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
2590 | |
2591 /* | |
2592 * GDK handler for X ClientMessage events. | |
2593 */ | |
2594 static GdkFilterReturn | |
2595 gdk_wm_protocols_filter(GdkXEvent *xev, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data) | |
2596 { | |
2597 /* From example in gdkevents.c/gdk_wm_protocols_filter */ | |
2598 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev; | |
2599 | |
2600 if (xevent != NULL) | |
2601 { | |
2602 if (xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom)) | |
2603 { | |
2604 out_flush(); | |
2605 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ | |
2606 | |
2607 /* Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager | |
2608 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be | |
2609 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL. */ | |
2610 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2611 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2612 NULL, 0); | |
2613 } | |
2614 /* | |
2615 * Functionality from gdkevents.c/gdk_wm_protocols_filter; | |
2616 * Registering this filter apparently overrides the default GDK one, | |
2617 * so we need to perform its functionality. There seems no way to | |
2618 * register for WM_PROTOCOLS, and only process the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF | |
2619 * bit; it's all or nothing. Update: No, there is a way -- but it | |
2620 * only works with GTK+ 2 apparently. See above. | |
2621 */ | |
2622 else if (xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(gdk_wm_delete_window)) | |
2623 { | |
2624 event->any.type = GDK_DELETE; | |
2625 return GDK_FILTER_TRANSLATE; | |
2626 } | |
2627 } | |
2628 | |
2629 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE; | |
2630 } | |
2631 # endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
2632 | |
2633 #endif /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */ | |
2634 | |
2635 | |
2636 /* | |
2637 * Setup the window icon & xcmdsrv comm after the main window has been realized. | |
2638 */ | |
2639 static void | |
1884 | 2640 mainwin_realize(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2641 { |
2642 /* If you get an error message here, you still need to unpack the runtime | |
2643 * archive! */ | |
2644 #ifdef magick | |
2645 # undef magick | |
2646 #endif | |
2647 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2648 /* A bit hackish, but avoids casting later and allows optimization */ | |
2649 # define static static const | |
2650 #endif | |
2651 #define magick vim32x32 | |
2652 #include "../runtime/vim32x32.xpm" | |
2653 #undef magick | |
2654 #define magick vim16x16 | |
2655 #include "../runtime/vim16x16.xpm" | |
2656 #undef magick | |
2657 #define magick vim48x48 | |
2658 #include "../runtime/vim48x48.xpm" | |
2659 #undef magick | |
2660 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2661 # undef static | |
2662 #endif | |
2663 | |
2664 /* When started with "--echo-wid" argument, write window ID on stdout. */ | |
2665 if (echo_wid_arg) | |
2666 { | |
2667 printf("WID: %ld\n", (long)GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window)); | |
2668 fflush(stdout); | |
2669 } | |
2670 | |
2671 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_ICON) != NULL) | |
2672 { | |
2673 /* | |
2674 * Add an icon to the main window. For fun and convenience of the user. | |
2675 */ | |
2676 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2677 GList *icons = NULL; | |
2678 | |
2679 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim16x16)); | |
2680 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim32x32)); | |
2681 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim48x48)); | |
2682 | |
2683 gtk_window_set_icon_list(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), icons); | |
2684 | |
2685 g_list_foreach(icons, (GFunc)&g_object_unref, NULL); | |
2686 g_list_free(icons); | |
2687 | |
2688 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
2689 | |
2690 GdkPixmap *icon; | |
2691 GdkBitmap *icon_mask = NULL; | |
2692 char **magick = vim32x32; | |
2693 Display *xdisplay; | |
2694 Window root_window; | |
2695 XIconSize *size; | |
2696 int number_sizes; | |
2697 /* | |
2698 * Adjust the icon to the preferences of the actual window manager. | |
1226 | 2699 * This is once again a workaround for a deficiency in GTK+ 1.2. |
7 | 2700 */ |
2701 xdisplay = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window); | |
2702 root_window = XRootWindow(xdisplay, DefaultScreen(xdisplay)); | |
2703 if (XGetIconSizes(xdisplay, root_window, &size, &number_sizes)) | |
2704 { | |
2705 if (number_sizes > 0) | |
2706 { | |
2707 if (size->max_height >= 48 && size->max_height >= 48) | |
2708 magick = vim48x48; | |
2709 else if (size->max_height >= 32 && size->max_height >= 32) | |
2710 magick = vim32x32; | |
2711 else if (size->max_height >= 16 && size->max_height >= 16) | |
2712 magick = vim16x16; | |
2713 } | |
2714 XFree(size); | |
2715 } | |
2716 icon = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d(gui.mainwin->window, | |
2717 &icon_mask, NULL, magick); | |
2718 if (icon != NULL) | |
2719 /* Note: for some reason gdk_window_set_icon() doesn't acquire | |
2720 * a reference on the pixmap, thus we _have_ to leak it. */ | |
2721 gdk_window_set_icon(gui.mainwin->window, NULL, icon, icon_mask); | |
2722 | |
2723 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
2724 } | |
2725 | |
2726 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
2727 /* Register a handler for WM_SAVE_YOURSELF with GDK's low-level X I/F */ | |
2728 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2729 gdk_window_add_filter(NULL, &global_event_filter, NULL); | |
2730 # else | |
2731 gdk_add_client_message_filter(wm_protocols_atom, | |
2732 &gdk_wm_protocols_filter, NULL); | |
2733 # endif | |
2734 #endif | |
2735 /* Setup to indicate to the window manager that we want to catch the | |
2736 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event. For GNOME, this connects to the session | |
2737 * manager instead. */ | |
2738 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
2739 if (using_gnome) | |
2740 #endif | |
2741 setup_save_yourself(); | |
2742 | |
2743 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER | |
2744 if (serverName == NULL && serverDelayedStartName != NULL) | |
2745 { | |
2746 /* This is a :gui command in a plain vim with no previous server */ | |
2747 commWindow = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window); | |
2748 | |
2749 (void)serverRegisterName(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2750 serverDelayedStartName); | |
2751 } | |
2752 else | |
2753 { | |
2754 /* | |
2755 * Cannot handle "XLib-only" windows with gtk event routines, we'll | |
2756 * have to change the "server" registration to that of the main window | |
2757 * If we have not registered a name yet, remember the window | |
2758 */ | |
2759 serverChangeRegisteredWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2760 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window)); | |
2761 } | |
2762 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK); | |
2763 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "property_notify_event", | |
2764 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(property_event), NULL); | |
2765 #endif | |
2766 } | |
2767 | |
2768 static GdkCursor * | |
2769 create_blank_pointer(void) | |
2770 { | |
2771 GdkWindow *root_window = NULL; | |
2772 GdkPixmap *blank_mask; | |
2773 GdkCursor *cursor; | |
2774 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; | |
2775 char blank_data[] = { 0x0 }; | |
2776 | |
2777 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
2778 root_window = gtk_widget_get_root_window(gui.mainwin); | |
2779 #endif | |
2780 | |
2781 /* Create a pseudo blank pointer, which is in fact one pixel by one pixel | |
2782 * in size. */ | |
2783 blank_mask = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data(root_window, blank_data, 1, 1); | |
2784 cursor = gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap(blank_mask, blank_mask, | |
2785 &color, &color, 0, 0); | |
2786 gdk_bitmap_unref(blank_mask); | |
2787 | |
2788 return cursor; | |
2789 } | |
2790 | |
2791 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
2792 static void | |
2793 mainwin_screen_changed_cb(GtkWidget *widget, | |
1884 | 2794 GdkScreen *previous_screen UNUSED, |
2795 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 2796 { |
2797 if (!gtk_widget_has_screen(widget)) | |
2798 return; | |
2799 | |
2800 /* | |
1226 | 2801 * Recreate the invisible mouse cursor. |
7 | 2802 */ |
2803 if (gui.blank_pointer != NULL) | |
2804 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer); | |
2805 | |
2806 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer(); | |
2807 | |
2808 if (gui.pointer_hidden && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
2809 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
2810 | |
2811 /* | |
2812 * Create a new PangoContext for this screen, and initialize it | |
2813 * with the current font if necessary. | |
2814 */ | |
2815 if (gui.text_context != NULL) | |
2816 g_object_unref(gui.text_context); | |
2817 | |
2818 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(widget); | |
2819 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR); | |
2820 | |
2821 if (gui.norm_font != NULL) | |
2822 { | |
38 | 2823 gui_mch_init_font(p_guifont, FALSE); |
814 | 2824 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, FALSE, RESIZE_BOTH); |
7 | 2825 } |
2826 } | |
2827 #endif /* HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD */ | |
2828 | |
2829 /* | |
2830 * After the drawing area comes up, we calculate all colors and create the | |
2831 * dummy blank cursor. | |
2832 * | |
2833 * Don't try to set any VIM scrollbar sizes anywhere here. I'm relying on the | |
2834 * fact that the main VIM engine doesn't take them into account anywhere. | |
2835 */ | |
2836 static void | |
1884 | 2837 drawarea_realize_cb(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2838 { |
2839 GtkWidget *sbar; | |
2840 | |
2841 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
2842 xim_init(); | |
2843 #endif | |
2844 gui_mch_new_colors(); | |
2845 gui.text_gc = gdk_gc_new(gui.drawarea->window); | |
2846 | |
2847 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer(); | |
2848 if (gui.pointer_hidden) | |
2849 gdk_window_set_cursor(widget->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
2850 | |
2851 /* get the actual size of the scrollbars, if they are realized */ | |
2852 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT].id; | |
2853 if (!sbar || (!gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT] | |
2854 && firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id)) | |
2855 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id; | |
2856 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.width) | |
2857 gui.scrollbar_width = sbar->allocation.width; | |
2858 | |
2859 sbar = gui.bottom_sbar.id; | |
2860 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.height) | |
2861 gui.scrollbar_height = sbar->allocation.height; | |
2862 } | |
2863 | |
2864 /* | |
2865 * Properly clean up on shutdown. | |
2866 */ | |
2867 static void | |
1884 | 2868 drawarea_unrealize_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2869 { |
2870 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
2871 full_screen = FALSE; | |
2872 | |
2873 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
2874 im_shutdown(); | |
2875 #endif | |
2876 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2877 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
2878 { | |
2879 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
2880 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL; | |
2881 } | |
2882 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL) | |
2883 { | |
2884 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font); | |
2885 gui.ascii_font = NULL; | |
2886 } | |
2887 g_object_unref(gui.text_context); | |
2888 gui.text_context = NULL; | |
2889 | |
2890 g_object_unref(gui.text_gc); | |
2891 gui.text_gc = NULL; | |
2892 | |
2893 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer); | |
2894 gui.blank_pointer = NULL; | |
2895 #else | |
2896 gdk_gc_unref(gui.text_gc); | |
2897 gui.text_gc = NULL; | |
2898 | |
2899 gdk_cursor_destroy(gui.blank_pointer); | |
2900 gui.blank_pointer = NULL; | |
2901 #endif | |
2902 } | |
2903 | |
2904 static void | |
1884 | 2905 drawarea_style_set_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
2906 GtkStyle *previous_style UNUSED, | |
2907 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 2908 { |
2909 gui_mch_new_colors(); | |
2910 } | |
2911 | |
2912 /* | |
2913 * Callback routine for the "delete_event" signal on the toplevel window. | |
2914 * Tries to vim gracefully, or refuses to exit with changed buffers. | |
2915 */ | |
2916 static gint | |
1884 | 2917 delete_event_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
2918 GdkEventAny *event UNUSED, | |
2919 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 2920 { |
2921 gui_shell_closed(); | |
2922 return TRUE; | |
2923 } | |
2924 | |
685 | 2925 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) |
2926 static int | |
2927 get_item_dimensions(GtkWidget *widget, GtkOrientation orientation) | |
2928 { | |
2929 GtkOrientation item_orientation = GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL; | |
2930 | |
2931 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
2932 if (using_gnome && widget != NULL) | |
2933 { | |
2934 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
856 | 2935 GtkWidget *parent; |
685 | 2936 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; |
2937 | |
791 | 2938 parent = gtk_widget_get_parent(widget); |
856 | 2939 if (G_TYPE_FROM_INSTANCE(parent) == BONOBO_TYPE_DOCK_ITEM) |
2940 { | |
2941 /* Only menu & toolbar are dock items. Could tabline be? | |
2942 * Seem to be only the 2 defined in GNOME */ | |
2943 widget = parent; | |
2944 dockitem = BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM(widget); | |
2945 | |
2946 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating) | |
2947 return 0; | |
2948 item_orientation = bonobo_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem); | |
2949 } | |
685 | 2950 # else |
2951 GnomeDockItem *dockitem; | |
2952 | |
2953 widget = widget->parent; | |
2954 dockitem = GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(widget); | |
2955 | |
2956 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating) | |
2957 return 0; | |
2958 item_orientation = gnome_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem); | |
2959 # endif | |
2960 } | |
2961 #endif | |
2962 if (widget != NULL | |
2963 && item_orientation == orientation | |
2964 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(widget) | |
2965 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget)) | |
2966 { | |
2967 if (orientation == GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL) | |
2968 return widget->allocation.height; | |
2969 else | |
2970 return widget->allocation.width; | |
2971 } | |
2972 return 0; | |
2973 } | |
2974 #endif | |
2975 | |
2976 static int | |
2977 get_menu_tool_width(void) | |
2978 { | |
2979 int width = 0; | |
2980 | |
2981 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME /* these are never vertical without GNOME */ | |
2982 # ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
2983 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
2984 # endif | |
2985 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
2986 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
2987 # endif | |
2988 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE | |
782 | 2989 if (gui.tabline != NULL) |
2990 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
685 | 2991 # endif |
2992 #endif | |
2993 | |
2994 return width; | |
2995 } | |
2996 | |
2997 static int | |
2998 get_menu_tool_height(void) | |
2999 { | |
3000 int height = 0; | |
3001 | |
3002 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
3003 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
3004 #endif | |
3005 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
3006 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
3007 #endif | |
3008 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE | |
782 | 3009 if (gui.tabline != NULL) |
3010 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
685 | 3011 #endif |
3012 | |
3013 return height; | |
3014 } | |
3015 | |
791 | 3016 /* This controls whether we can set the real window hints at |
3017 * start-up when in a GtkPlug. | |
3018 * 0 = normal processing (default) | |
3019 * 1 = init. hints set, no-one's tried to reset since last check | |
3020 * 2 = init. hints set, attempt made to change hints | |
3021 */ | |
3022 static int init_window_hints_state = 0; | |
3023 | |
685 | 3024 static void |
791 | 3025 update_window_manager_hints(int force_width, int force_height) |
685 | 3026 { |
3027 static int old_width = 0; | |
3028 static int old_height = 0; | |
791 | 3029 static int old_min_width = 0; |
3030 static int old_min_height = 0; | |
685 | 3031 static int old_char_width = 0; |
3032 static int old_char_height = 0; | |
3033 | |
3034 int width; | |
3035 int height; | |
791 | 3036 int min_width; |
3037 int min_height; | |
3038 | |
3039 /* At start-up, don't try to set the hints until the initial | |
3040 * values have been used (those that dictate our initial size) | |
1884 | 3041 * Let forced (i.e., correct) values through always. |
791 | 3042 */ |
3043 if (!(force_width && force_height) && init_window_hints_state > 0) | |
3044 { | |
856 | 3045 /* Don't do it! */ |
3046 init_window_hints_state = 2; | |
3047 return; | |
791 | 3048 } |
685 | 3049 |
3050 /* This also needs to be done when the main window isn't there yet, | |
3051 * otherwise the hints don't work. */ | |
3052 width = gui_get_base_width(); | |
3053 height = gui_get_base_height(); | |
3054 # ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
3055 height += tabline_height() * gui.char_height; | |
3056 # endif | |
3057 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3058 width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
3059 height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
3060 # endif | |
3061 | |
791 | 3062 /* GtkSockets use GtkPlug's [gui,mainwin] min-size hints to determine |
1226 | 3063 * their actual widget size. When we set our size ourselves (e.g., |
791 | 3064 * 'set columns=' or init. -geom) we briefly set the min. to the size |
3065 * we wish to be instead of the legitimate minimum so that we actually | |
3066 * resize correctly. | |
3067 */ | |
3068 if (force_width && force_height) | |
3069 { | |
856 | 3070 min_width = force_width; |
3071 min_height = force_height; | |
791 | 3072 } |
3073 else | |
3074 { | |
856 | 3075 min_width = width + MIN_COLUMNS * gui.char_width; |
3076 min_height = height + MIN_LINES * gui.char_height; | |
791 | 3077 } |
3078 | |
685 | 3079 /* Avoid an expose event when the size didn't change. */ |
3080 if (width != old_width | |
3081 || height != old_height | |
856 | 3082 || min_width != old_min_width |
791 | 3083 || min_height != old_min_height |
685 | 3084 || gui.char_width != old_char_width |
3085 || gui.char_height != old_char_height) | |
3086 { | |
3087 GdkGeometry geometry; | |
3088 GdkWindowHints geometry_mask; | |
3089 | |
3090 geometry.width_inc = gui.char_width; | |
3091 geometry.height_inc = gui.char_height; | |
3092 geometry.base_width = width; | |
3093 geometry.base_height = height; | |
856 | 3094 geometry.min_width = min_width; |
3095 geometry.min_height = min_height; | |
685 | 3096 geometry_mask = GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE|GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC |
3097 |GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE; | |
3098 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3099 /* Using gui.formwin as geometry widget doesn't work as expected | |
3100 * with GTK+ 2 -- dunno why. Presumably all the resizing hacks | |
3101 * in Vim confuse GTK+. */ | |
3102 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.mainwin, | |
3103 &geometry, geometry_mask); | |
3104 # else | |
3105 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.formwin, | |
3106 &geometry, geometry_mask); | |
3107 # endif | |
856 | 3108 old_width = width; |
3109 old_height = height; | |
3110 old_min_width = min_width; | |
3111 old_min_height = min_height; | |
3112 old_char_width = gui.char_width; | |
3113 old_char_height = gui.char_height; | |
685 | 3114 } |
3115 } | |
3116 | |
7 | 3117 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR |
3118 | |
3119 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3120 /* | |
3121 * This extra effort wouldn't be necessary if we only used stock icons in the | |
3122 * toolbar, as we do for all builtin icons. But user-defined toolbar icons | |
3123 * shouldn't be treated differently, thus we do need this. | |
3124 */ | |
3125 static void | |
3126 icon_size_changed_foreach(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer user_data) | |
3127 { | |
3128 if (GTK_IS_IMAGE(widget)) | |
3129 { | |
3130 GtkImage *image = (GtkImage *)widget; | |
3131 | |
3132 /* User-defined icons are stored in a GtkIconSet */ | |
3133 if (gtk_image_get_storage_type(image) == GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET) | |
3134 { | |
3135 GtkIconSet *icon_set; | |
3136 GtkIconSize icon_size; | |
3137 | |
3138 gtk_image_get_icon_set(image, &icon_set, &icon_size); | |
3139 icon_size = (GtkIconSize)(long)user_data; | |
3140 | |
3141 gtk_icon_set_ref(icon_set); | |
3142 gtk_image_set_from_icon_set(image, icon_set, icon_size); | |
3143 gtk_icon_set_unref(icon_set); | |
3144 } | |
3145 } | |
3146 else if (GTK_IS_CONTAINER(widget)) | |
3147 { | |
3148 gtk_container_foreach((GtkContainer *)widget, | |
3149 &icon_size_changed_foreach, | |
3150 user_data); | |
3151 } | |
3152 } | |
3153 # endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
3154 | |
3155 static void | |
3156 set_toolbar_style(GtkToolbar *toolbar) | |
3157 { | |
3158 GtkToolbarStyle style; | |
3159 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3160 GtkIconSize size; | |
3161 GtkIconSize oldsize; | |
3162 # endif | |
3163 | |
3164 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3165 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ)) | |
3166 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ)) | |
3167 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ; | |
3168 else | |
3169 # endif | |
3170 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)) | |
3171 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)) | |
3172 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH; | |
3173 else if (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TEXT) | |
3174 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_TEXT; | |
3175 else | |
3176 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS; | |
3177 | |
3178 gtk_toolbar_set_style(toolbar, style); | |
3179 gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips(toolbar, (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TOOLTIPS) != 0); | |
3180 | |
3181 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3182 switch (tbis_flags) | |
3183 { | |
3184 case TBIS_TINY: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU; break; | |
3185 case TBIS_SMALL: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR; break; | |
3186 case TBIS_MEDIUM: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON; break; | |
3187 case TBIS_LARGE: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR; break; | |
3188 default: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID; break; | |
3189 } | |
3190 oldsize = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar); | |
3191 | |
3192 if (size == GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID) | |
3193 { | |
3194 /* Let global user preferences decide the icon size. */ | |
3195 gtk_toolbar_unset_icon_size(toolbar); | |
3196 size = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar); | |
3197 } | |
3198 if (size != oldsize) | |
3199 { | |
3200 gtk_container_foreach(GTK_CONTAINER(toolbar), | |
3201 &icon_size_changed_foreach, | |
3202 GINT_TO_POINTER((int)size)); | |
3203 } | |
3204 gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size(toolbar, size); | |
3205 # endif | |
3206 } | |
3207 | |
3208 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
3209 | |
685 | 3210 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(PROTO) |
3211 static int ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; | |
689 | 3212 static GtkWidget *tabline_menu; |
846 | 3213 static GtkTooltips *tabline_tooltip; |
689 | 3214 static int clicked_page; /* page clicked in tab line */ |
3215 | |
3216 /* | |
3217 * Handle selecting an item in the tab line popup menu. | |
3218 */ | |
3219 static void | |
1884 | 3220 tabline_menu_handler(GtkMenuItem *item UNUSED, gpointer user_data) |
689 | 3221 { |
3222 /* Add the string cmd into input buffer */ | |
824 | 3223 send_tabline_menu_event(clicked_page, (int)(long)user_data); |
689 | 3224 |
3225 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
3226 gtk_main_quit(); | |
3227 } | |
3228 | |
851 | 3229 static void |
3230 add_tabline_menu_item(GtkWidget *menu, char_u *text, int resp) | |
3231 { | |
3232 GtkWidget *item; | |
3233 char_u *utf_text; | |
3234 | |
3235 utf_text = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(text); | |
3236 item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label((const char *)utf_text); | |
3237 gtk_widget_show(item); | |
3238 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(utf_text); | |
3239 | |
3240 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(menu), item); | |
3241 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(item), "activate", | |
3242 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(tabline_menu_handler), | |
1660 | 3243 (gpointer)(long)resp); |
851 | 3244 } |
3245 | |
689 | 3246 /* |
3247 * Create a menu for the tab line. | |
3248 */ | |
3249 static GtkWidget * | |
3250 create_tabline_menu(void) | |
3251 { | |
851 | 3252 GtkWidget *menu; |
689 | 3253 |
3254 menu = gtk_menu_new(); | |
851 | 3255 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("Close"), TABLINE_MENU_CLOSE); |
3256 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("New tab"), TABLINE_MENU_NEW); | |
3257 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("Open Tab..."), TABLINE_MENU_OPEN); | |
689 | 3258 |
3259 return menu; | |
3260 } | |
3261 | |
3262 static gboolean | |
3263 on_tabline_menu(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event) | |
3264 { | |
3265 /* Was this button press event ? */ | |
3266 if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) | |
3267 { | |
3268 GdkEventButton *bevent = (GdkEventButton *)event; | |
3269 int x = bevent->x; | |
851 | 3270 int y = bevent->y; |
3271 GtkWidget *tabwidget; | |
3272 GdkWindow *tabwin; | |
689 | 3273 |
844 | 3274 /* When ignoring events return TRUE so that the selected page doesn't |
3275 * change. */ | |
3276 if (hold_gui_events | |
3277 # ifdef FEAT_CMDWIN | |
3278 || cmdwin_type != 0 | |
3279 # endif | |
3280 ) | |
3281 return TRUE; | |
3282 | |
851 | 3283 tabwin = gdk_window_at_pointer(&x, &y); |
3284 gdk_window_get_user_data(tabwin, (gpointer)&tabwidget); | |
3285 clicked_page = (int)(long)gtk_object_get_user_data( | |
3286 GTK_OBJECT(tabwidget)); | |
689 | 3287 |
3288 /* If the event was generated for 3rd button popup the menu. */ | |
3289 if (bevent->button == 3) | |
3290 { | |
3291 gtk_menu_popup(GTK_MENU(widget), NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, | |
3292 bevent->button, bevent->time); | |
3293 /* We handled the event. */ | |
3294 return TRUE; | |
3295 } | |
868 | 3296 else if (bevent->button == 1) |
693 | 3297 { |
868 | 3298 if (clicked_page == 0) |
3299 { | |
1394 | 3300 /* Click after all tabs moves to next tab page. When "x" is |
3301 * small guess it's the left button. */ | |
3302 if (send_tabline_event(x < 50 ? -1 : 0) && gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
868 | 3303 gtk_main_quit(); |
3304 } | |
3305 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3306 else | |
3307 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), | |
3308 clicked_page - 1); | |
3309 #endif | |
693 | 3310 } |
689 | 3311 } |
844 | 3312 |
689 | 3313 /* We didn't handle the event. */ |
3314 return FALSE; | |
3315 } | |
685 | 3316 |
3317 /* | |
3318 * Handle selecting one of the tabs. | |
3319 */ | |
3320 static void | |
3321 on_select_tab( | |
1884 | 3322 GtkNotebook *notebook UNUSED, |
3323 GtkNotebookPage *page UNUSED, | |
944 | 3324 gint idx, |
1884 | 3325 gpointer data UNUSED) |
685 | 3326 { |
3327 if (!ignore_tabline_evt) | |
693 | 3328 { |
944 | 3329 if (send_tabline_event(idx + 1) && gtk_main_level() > 0) |
693 | 3330 gtk_main_quit(); |
3331 } | |
685 | 3332 } |
3333 | |
714 | 3334 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 |
3335 static int showing_tabline = 0; | |
3336 #endif | |
3337 | |
685 | 3338 /* |
3339 * Show or hide the tabline. | |
3340 */ | |
3341 void | |
3342 gui_mch_show_tabline(int showit) | |
3343 { | |
3344 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
3345 return; | |
3346 | |
714 | 3347 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
3348 /* gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs does not exist in gtk+-1.2.10 */ | |
685 | 3349 if (!showit != !gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline))) |
714 | 3350 #else |
3351 if (!showit != !showing_tabline) | |
3352 #endif | |
685 | 3353 { |
708 | 3354 /* Note: this may cause a resize event */ |
685 | 3355 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), showit); |
791 | 3356 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
714 | 3357 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 |
3358 showing_tabline = showit; | |
3359 #endif | |
868 | 3360 if (showit) |
3361 GTK_WIDGET_UNSET_FLAGS(GTK_WIDGET(gui.tabline), GTK_CAN_FOCUS); | |
3362 } | |
3363 | |
3364 gui_mch_update(); | |
685 | 3365 } |
3366 | |
3367 /* | |
708 | 3368 * Return TRUE when tabline is displayed. |
3369 */ | |
3370 int | |
3371 gui_mch_showing_tabline(void) | |
3372 { | |
3373 return gui.tabline != NULL | |
714 | 3374 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
3375 /* gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs does not exist in gtk+-1.2.10 */ | |
3376 && gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) | |
3377 #else | |
3378 && showing_tabline | |
3379 #endif | |
3380 ; | |
708 | 3381 } |
3382 | |
3383 /* | |
685 | 3384 * Update the labels of the tabline. |
3385 */ | |
3386 void | |
3387 gui_mch_update_tabline(void) | |
3388 { | |
3389 GtkWidget *page; | |
846 | 3390 GtkWidget *event_box; |
685 | 3391 GtkWidget *label; |
3392 tabpage_T *tp; | |
3393 int nr = 0; | |
851 | 3394 int tab_num; |
685 | 3395 int curtabidx = 0; |
836 | 3396 char_u *labeltext; |
685 | 3397 |
3398 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
3399 return; | |
3400 | |
3401 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE; | |
3402 | |
3403 /* Add a label for each tab page. They all contain the same text area. */ | |
3404 for (tp = first_tabpage; tp != NULL; tp = tp->tp_next, ++nr) | |
3405 { | |
3406 if (tp == curtab) | |
3407 curtabidx = nr; | |
3408 | |
851 | 3409 tab_num = nr + 1; |
3410 | |
685 | 3411 page = gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr); |
3412 if (page == NULL) | |
3413 { | |
3414 /* Add notebook page */ | |
3415 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); | |
3416 gtk_widget_show(page); | |
846 | 3417 event_box = gtk_event_box_new(); |
3418 gtk_widget_show(event_box); | |
685 | 3419 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-"); |
851 | 3420 gtk_misc_set_padding(GTK_MISC(label), 2, 2); |
846 | 3421 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), label); |
685 | 3422 gtk_widget_show(label); |
3423 gtk_notebook_insert_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), | |
3424 page, | |
846 | 3425 event_box, |
685 | 3426 nr++); |
3427 } | |
3428 | |
846 | 3429 event_box = gtk_notebook_get_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page); |
1660 | 3430 gtk_object_set_user_data(GTK_OBJECT(event_box), |
3431 (gpointer)(long)tab_num); | |
846 | 3432 label = GTK_BIN(event_box)->child; |
839 | 3433 get_tabline_label(tp, FALSE); |
836 | 3434 labeltext = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(NameBuff); |
846 | 3435 gtk_label_set_text(GTK_LABEL(label), (const char *)labeltext); |
836 | 3436 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(labeltext); |
846 | 3437 |
3438 get_tabline_label(tp, TRUE); | |
3439 labeltext = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(NameBuff); | |
3440 gtk_tooltips_set_tip(GTK_TOOLTIPS(tabline_tooltip), event_box, | |
3441 (const char *)labeltext, NULL); | |
3442 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(labeltext); | |
685 | 3443 } |
3444 | |
3445 /* Remove any old labels. */ | |
3446 while (gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr) != NULL) | |
3447 gtk_notebook_remove_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr); | |
3448 | |
3449 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != curtabidx) | |
856 | 3450 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), curtabidx); |
685 | 3451 |
851 | 3452 /* Make sure everything is in place before drawing text. */ |
3453 gui_mch_update(); | |
3454 | |
685 | 3455 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; |
3456 } | |
3457 | |
3458 /* | |
3459 * Set the current tab to "nr". First tab is 1. | |
3460 */ | |
3461 void | |
3462 gui_mch_set_curtab(nr) | |
3463 int nr; | |
3464 { | |
3465 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
3466 return; | |
3467 | |
3468 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE; | |
3469 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != nr - 1) | |
856 | 3470 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr - 1); |
685 | 3471 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; |
3472 } | |
3473 | |
3474 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */ | |
3475 | |
7 | 3476 /* |
3477 * Initialize the GUI. Create all the windows, set up all the callbacks etc. | |
3478 * Returns OK for success, FAIL when the GUI can't be started. | |
3479 */ | |
3480 int | |
3481 gui_mch_init(void) | |
3482 { | |
3483 GtkWidget *vbox; | |
3484 | |
3485 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
3486 /* Initialize the GNOME libraries. gnome_program_init()/gnome_init() | |
3487 * exits on failure, but that's a non-issue because we already called | |
3488 * gtk_init_check() in gui_mch_init_check(). */ | |
3489 if (using_gnome) | |
3490 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3491 gnome_program_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT, | |
3492 LIBGNOMEUI_MODULE, gui_argc, gui_argv, NULL); | |
3493 # else | |
3494 gnome_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT, gui_argc, gui_argv); | |
3495 # endif | |
3496 #endif | |
3497 vim_free(gui_argv); | |
3498 gui_argv = NULL; | |
3499 | |
3500 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3501 # if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,3) | |
3502 /* Set the human-readable application name */ | |
3503 g_set_application_name("Vim"); | |
3504 # endif | |
3505 /* | |
3506 * Force UTF-8 output no matter what the value of 'encoding' is. | |
3507 * did_set_string_option() in option.c prohibits changing 'termencoding' | |
3508 * to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is in use. | |
3509 */ | |
3510 set_option_value((char_u *)"termencoding", 0L, (char_u *)"utf-8", 0); | |
3511 | |
3512 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
3513 gui_gtk_register_stock_icons(); | |
3514 # endif | |
3515 /* FIXME: Need to install the classic icons and a gtkrc.classic file. | |
3516 * The hard part is deciding install locations and the Makefile magic. */ | |
3517 # if 0 | |
3518 gtk_rc_parse("gtkrc"); | |
3519 # endif | |
3520 #endif | |
3521 | |
3522 /* Initialize values */ | |
3523 gui.border_width = 2; | |
3524 gui.scrollbar_width = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH; | |
3525 gui.scrollbar_height = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH; | |
136 | 3526 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
7 | 3527 gui.fgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); |
136 | 3528 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
7 | 3529 gui.bgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); |
207 | 3530 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
3531 gui.spcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); | |
7 | 3532 |
3533 /* Initialise atoms */ | |
3534 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 3535 html_atom = gdk_atom_intern("text/html", FALSE); |
7 | 3536 utf8_string_atom = gdk_atom_intern("UTF8_STRING", FALSE); |
3537 #endif | |
3538 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3539 compound_text_atom = gdk_atom_intern("COMPOUND_TEXT", FALSE); | |
3540 text_atom = gdk_atom_intern("TEXT", FALSE); | |
3541 #endif | |
3542 | |
3543 /* Set default foreground and background colors. */ | |
3544 gui.norm_pixel = gui.def_norm_pixel; | |
3545 gui.back_pixel = gui.def_back_pixel; | |
3546 | |
3547 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
3548 { | |
3549 GtkWidget *plug; | |
3550 | |
3551 /* Use GtkSocket from another app. */ | |
3552 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
3553 plug = gtk_plug_new_for_display(gdk_display_get_default(), | |
3554 gtk_socket_id); | |
3555 #else | |
3556 plug = gtk_plug_new(gtk_socket_id); | |
3557 #endif | |
3558 if (plug != NULL && GTK_PLUG(plug)->socket_window != NULL) | |
3559 { | |
3560 gui.mainwin = plug; | |
3561 } | |
3562 else | |
3563 { | |
3564 g_warning("Connection to GTK+ socket (ID %u) failed", | |
3565 (unsigned int)gtk_socket_id); | |
3566 /* Pretend we never wanted it if it failed (get own window) */ | |
3567 gtk_socket_id = 0; | |
3568 } | |
3569 } | |
3570 | |
3571 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
3572 { | |
3573 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
3574 if (using_gnome) | |
3575 { | |
3576 gui.mainwin = gnome_app_new("Vim", NULL); | |
3577 # ifdef USE_XSMP | |
3578 /* Use the GNOME save-yourself functionality now. */ | |
3579 xsmp_close(); | |
3580 # endif | |
3581 } | |
3582 else | |
3583 #endif | |
3584 gui.mainwin = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL); | |
3585 } | |
3586 | |
3587 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.mainwin, "vim-main-window"); | |
3588 | |
3589 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3590 /* Create the PangoContext used for drawing all text. */ | |
3591 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(gui.mainwin); | |
3592 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR); | |
3593 #endif | |
3594 | |
3595 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3596 gtk_window_set_policy(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), TRUE, TRUE, TRUE); | |
3597 #endif | |
3598 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), 0); | |
3599 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK); | |
3600 | |
3601 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "delete_event", | |
3602 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&delete_event_cb), NULL); | |
3603 | |
3604 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "realize", | |
3605 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&mainwin_realize), NULL); | |
3606 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
3607 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "screen_changed", | |
3608 G_CALLBACK(&mainwin_screen_changed_cb), NULL); | |
3609 #endif | |
3610 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3611 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_new(); | |
3612 gtk_window_add_accel_group(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.accel_group); | |
3613 #else | |
3614 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_get_default(); | |
3615 #endif | |
3616 | |
685 | 3617 /* A vertical box holds the menubar, toolbar and main text window. */ |
7 | 3618 vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); |
3619 | |
3620 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
3621 if (using_gnome) | |
3622 { | |
3623 # if defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU) | |
3624 /* automagically restore menubar/toolbar placement */ | |
3625 gnome_app_enable_layout_config(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), TRUE); | |
3626 # endif | |
3627 gnome_app_set_contents(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), vbox); | |
3628 } | |
3629 else | |
3630 #endif | |
3631 { | |
3632 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), vbox); | |
3633 gtk_widget_show(vbox); | |
3634 } | |
3635 | |
3636 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
3637 /* | |
3638 * Create the menubar and handle | |
3639 */ | |
3640 gui.menubar = gtk_menu_bar_new(); | |
3641 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.menubar, "vim-menubar"); | |
3642 | |
36 | 3643 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
3644 /* Avoid that GTK takes <F10> away from us. */ | |
3645 { | |
3646 GtkSettings *gtk_settings; | |
3647 | |
3648 gtk_settings = gtk_settings_get_for_screen(gdk_screen_get_default()); | |
3649 g_object_set(gtk_settings, "gtk-menu-bar-accel", NULL, NULL); | |
3650 } | |
3651 # endif | |
3652 | |
3653 | |
7 | 3654 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME |
3655 if (using_gnome) | |
3656 { | |
3657 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3658 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; | |
3659 | |
3660 gnome_app_set_menus(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_MENU_BAR(gui.menubar)); | |
3661 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), | |
3662 GNOME_APP_MENUBAR_NAME); | |
798 | 3663 /* We don't want the menu to float. */ |
3664 bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem, | |
3665 bonobo_dock_item_get_behavior(dockitem) | |
3666 | BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING); | |
7 | 3667 gui.menubar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem); |
3668 # else | |
3669 gui.menubar_h = gnome_dock_item_new("VimMainMenu", | |
3670 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE | | |
3671 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_VERTICAL); | |
3672 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.menubar_h), gui.menubar); | |
3673 | |
3674 gnome_dock_add_item(GNOME_DOCK(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin)->dock), | |
3675 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(gui.menubar_h), | |
3676 GNOME_DOCK_TOP, /* placement */ | |
3677 1, /* band_num */ | |
3678 0, /* band_position */ | |
3679 0, /* offset */ | |
3680 TRUE); | |
3681 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar); | |
3682 # endif | |
3683 } | |
3684 else | |
3685 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */ | |
3686 { | |
827 | 3687 /* Always show the menubar, otherwise <F10> doesn't work. It may be |
3688 * disabled in gui_init() later. */ | |
3689 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar); | |
7 | 3690 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.menubar, FALSE, FALSE, 0); |
3691 } | |
3692 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
3693 | |
3694 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
3695 /* | |
3696 * Create the toolbar and handle | |
3697 */ | |
3698 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3699 /* some aesthetics on the toolbar */ | |
3700 gtk_rc_parse_string( | |
3701 "style \"vim-toolbar-style\" {\n" | |
3702 " GtkToolbar::button_relief = GTK_RELIEF_NONE\n" | |
3703 "}\n" | |
3704 "widget \"*.vim-toolbar\" style \"vim-toolbar-style\"\n"); | |
3705 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new(); | |
3706 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.toolbar, "vim-toolbar"); | |
3707 # else | |
3708 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new(GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, | |
3709 GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS); | |
3710 gtk_toolbar_set_button_relief(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar), GTK_RELIEF_NONE); | |
3711 # endif | |
3712 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
3713 | |
3714 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
3715 if (using_gnome) | |
3716 { | |
3717 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3718 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; | |
3719 | |
3720 gnome_app_set_toolbar(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
3721 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), | |
3722 GNOME_APP_TOOLBAR_NAME); | |
3723 gui.toolbar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem); | |
795 | 3724 /* When the toolbar is floating it gets stuck. So long as that isn't |
798 | 3725 * fixed let's disallow floating. */ |
795 | 3726 bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem, |
798 | 3727 bonobo_dock_item_get_behavior(dockitem) |
3728 | BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING); | |
7 | 3729 gtk_container_set_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 0); |
3730 # else | |
3731 GtkWidget *dockitem; | |
3732 | |
3733 dockitem = gnome_dock_item_new("VimToolBar", | |
3734 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE); | |
3735 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(dockitem), GTK_WIDGET(gui.toolbar)); | |
3736 gui.toolbar_h = dockitem; | |
3737 | |
3738 gnome_dock_add_item(GNOME_DOCK(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin)->dock), | |
3739 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(dockitem), | |
3740 GNOME_DOCK_TOP, /* placement */ | |
3741 1, /* band_num */ | |
3742 1, /* band_position */ | |
3743 0, /* offset */ | |
3744 TRUE); | |
3745 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 2); | |
3746 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar); | |
3747 # endif | |
3748 } | |
3749 else | |
3750 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */ | |
3751 { | |
3752 # ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3753 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 1); | |
3754 # endif | |
3755 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) != NULL | |
3756 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))) | |
3757 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar); | |
3758 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.toolbar, FALSE, FALSE, 0); | |
3759 } | |
3760 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
3761 | |
685 | 3762 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE |
782 | 3763 /* |
3764 * Use a Notebook for the tab pages labels. The labels are hidden by | |
3765 * default. | |
3766 */ | |
791 | 3767 gui.tabline = gtk_notebook_new(); |
3768 gtk_widget_show(gui.tabline); | |
3769 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.tabline, FALSE, FALSE, 0); | |
3770 gtk_notebook_set_show_border(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); | |
3771 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); | |
841 | 3772 gtk_notebook_set_scrollable(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), TRUE); |
868 | 3773 gtk_notebook_set_tab_border(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); |
791 | 3774 |
846 | 3775 tabline_tooltip = gtk_tooltips_new(); |
3776 gtk_tooltips_enable(GTK_TOOLTIPS(tabline_tooltip)); | |
3777 | |
3778 { | |
3779 GtkWidget *page, *label, *event_box; | |
791 | 3780 |
856 | 3781 /* Add the first tab. */ |
846 | 3782 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); |
3783 gtk_widget_show(page); | |
3784 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.tabline), page); | |
3785 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-"); | |
3786 gtk_widget_show(label); | |
3787 event_box = gtk_event_box_new(); | |
3788 gtk_widget_show(event_box); | |
1660 | 3789 gtk_object_set_user_data(GTK_OBJECT(event_box), (gpointer)1L); |
851 | 3790 gtk_misc_set_padding(GTK_MISC(label), 2, 2); |
846 | 3791 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), label); |
3792 gtk_notebook_set_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page, event_box); | |
791 | 3793 } |
865 | 3794 |
791 | 3795 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "switch_page", |
856 | 3796 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_select_tab), NULL); |
791 | 3797 |
3798 /* Create a popup menu for the tab line and connect it. */ | |
3799 tabline_menu = create_tabline_menu(); | |
3800 gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "button_press_event", | |
856 | 3801 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_tabline_menu), GTK_OBJECT(tabline_menu)); |
685 | 3802 #endif |
3803 | |
7 | 3804 gui.formwin = gtk_form_new(); |
3805 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.formwin), 0); | |
3806 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.formwin, GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK); | |
3807 | |
3808 gui.drawarea = gtk_drawing_area_new(); | |
3809 | |
3810 /* Determine which events we will filter. */ | |
3811 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.drawarea, | |
3812 GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK | | |
3813 GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK | | |
3814 GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK | | |
3815 GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | | |
3816 GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK | | |
3817 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3818 GDK_SCROLL_MASK | | |
3819 #endif | |
3820 GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK | | |
3821 GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK | | |
3822 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | | |
3823 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK); | |
3824 | |
3825 gtk_widget_show(gui.drawarea); | |
3826 gtk_form_put(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), gui.drawarea, 0, 0); | |
3827 gtk_widget_show(gui.formwin); | |
3828 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.formwin, TRUE, TRUE, 0); | |
3829 | |
3830 /* For GtkSockets, key-presses must go to the focus widget (drawarea) | |
3831 * and not the window. */ | |
3832 gtk_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin) | |
3833 : GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), | |
3834 "key_press_event", | |
3835 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(key_press_event), NULL); | |
3836 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) | |
3837 /* Also forward key release events for the benefit of GTK+ 2 input | |
3838 * modules. Try CTRL-SHIFT-xdigits to enter a Unicode code point. */ | |
3839 g_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin) | |
3840 : G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), | |
3841 "key_release_event", | |
3842 G_CALLBACK(&key_release_event), NULL); | |
3843 #endif | |
3844 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "realize", | |
3845 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_realize_cb), NULL); | |
3846 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "unrealize", | |
3847 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_unrealize_cb), NULL); | |
3848 | |
3849 gtk_signal_connect_after(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "style_set", | |
3850 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&drawarea_style_set_cb), NULL); | |
3851 | |
3852 gui.visibility = GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED; | |
3853 | |
3854 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
3855 wm_protocols_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_PROTOCOLS", FALSE); | |
3856 save_yourself_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_SAVE_YOURSELF", FALSE); | |
3857 #endif | |
3858 | |
3859 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
1884 | 3860 /* make sure keyboard input can go to the drawarea */ |
7 | 3861 GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS(gui.drawarea, GTK_CAN_FOCUS); |
3862 | |
3863 /* | |
3864 * Set clipboard specific atoms | |
3865 */ | |
3866 vim_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIM_ATOM_NAME, FALSE); | |
3867 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
3868 vimenc_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, FALSE); | |
3869 #endif | |
3870 clip_star.gtk_sel_atom = GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY; | |
3871 clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom = gdk_atom_intern("CLIPBOARD", FALSE); | |
3872 | |
3873 /* | |
3874 * Start out by adding the configured border width into the border offset. | |
3875 */ | |
3876 gui.border_offset = gui.border_width; | |
3877 | |
3878 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "visibility_notify_event", | |
3879 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(visibility_event), NULL); | |
3880 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "expose_event", | |
3881 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(expose_event), NULL); | |
3882 | |
3883 /* | |
3884 * Only install these enter/leave callbacks when 'p' in 'guioptions'. | |
3885 * Only needed for some window managers. | |
3886 */ | |
3887 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_POINTER) != NULL) | |
3888 { | |
3889 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "leave_notify_event", | |
3890 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(leave_notify_event), NULL); | |
3891 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "enter_notify_event", | |
3892 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(enter_notify_event), NULL); | |
3893 } | |
3894 | |
791 | 3895 /* Real windows can get focus ... GtkPlug, being a mere container can't, |
3896 * only its widgets. Arguably, this could be common code and we not use | |
3897 * the window focus at all, but let's be safe. | |
3898 */ | |
3899 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
3900 { | |
856 | 3901 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_out_event", |
3902 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
3903 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_in_event", | |
3904 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
791 | 3905 } |
3906 else | |
3907 { | |
856 | 3908 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_out_event", |
3909 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
3910 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_in_event", | |
3911 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
791 | 3912 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE |
856 | 3913 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_out_event", |
3914 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
3915 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_in_event", | |
3916 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
791 | 3917 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */ |
3918 } | |
7 | 3919 |
3920 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "motion_notify_event", | |
3921 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(motion_notify_event), NULL); | |
3922 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_press_event", | |
3923 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_press_event), NULL); | |
3924 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_release_event", | |
3925 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_release_event), NULL); | |
3926 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3927 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "scroll_event", | |
3928 G_CALLBACK(&scroll_event), NULL); | |
3929 #endif | |
3930 | |
3931 /* | |
3932 * Add selection handler functions. | |
3933 */ | |
3934 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_clear_event", | |
3935 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_clear_event), NULL); | |
3936 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_received", | |
3937 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_received_cb), NULL); | |
3938 | |
3939 /* | |
3940 * Add selection targets for PRIMARY and CLIPBOARD selections. | |
3941 */ | |
3942 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea, | |
3943 (GdkAtom)GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, | |
3944 selection_targets, N_SELECTION_TARGETS); | |
3945 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea, | |
3946 (GdkAtom)clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom, | |
3947 selection_targets, N_SELECTION_TARGETS); | |
3948 | |
3949 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_get", | |
3950 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_get_cb), NULL); | |
3951 | |
3952 /* Pretend we don't have input focus, we will get an event if we do. */ | |
3953 gui.in_focus = FALSE; | |
3954 | |
3955 return OK; | |
3956 } | |
3957 | |
3958 #if (defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) || defined(PROTO) | |
3959 /* | |
3960 * This is called from gui_start() after a fork() has been done. | |
3961 * We have to tell the session manager our new PID. | |
3962 */ | |
3963 void | |
3964 gui_mch_forked(void) | |
3965 { | |
3966 if (using_gnome) | |
3967 { | |
3968 GnomeClient *client; | |
3969 | |
3970 client = gnome_master_client(); | |
3971 | |
3972 if (client != NULL) | |
3973 gnome_client_set_process_id(client, getpid()); | |
3974 } | |
3975 } | |
3976 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION */ | |
3977 | |
3978 /* | |
3979 * Called when the foreground or background color has been changed. | |
3980 * This used to change the graphics contexts directly but we are | |
3981 * currently manipulating them where desired. | |
3982 */ | |
3983 void | |
3984 gui_mch_new_colors(void) | |
3985 { | |
3986 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
3987 { | |
3988 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; | |
3989 | |
3990 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel; | |
3991 gdk_window_set_background(gui.drawarea->window, &color); | |
3992 } | |
3993 } | |
3994 | |
3995 /* | |
3996 * This signal informs us about the need to rearrange our sub-widgets. | |
3997 */ | |
3998 static gint | |
1884 | 3999 form_configure_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
4000 GdkEventConfigure *event, | |
4001 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 4002 { |
791 | 4003 int usable_height = event->height; |
4004 | |
4005 /* When in a GtkPlug, we can't guarantee valid heights (as a round | |
4006 * no. of char-heights), so we have to manually sanitise them. | |
4007 * Widths seem to sort themselves out, don't ask me why. | |
4008 */ | |
4009 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
856 | 4010 usable_height -= (gui.char_height - (gui.char_height/2)); /* sic. */ |
791 | 4011 |
7 | 4012 gtk_form_freeze(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)); |
791 | 4013 gui_resize_shell(event->width, usable_height); |
7 | 4014 gtk_form_thaw(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)); |
4015 | |
4016 return TRUE; | |
4017 } | |
4018 | |
4019 /* | |
4020 * Function called when window already closed. | |
4021 * We can't do much more here than to trying to preserve what had been done, | |
4022 * since the window is already inevitably going away. | |
4023 */ | |
4024 static void | |
1884 | 4025 mainwin_destroy_cb(GtkObject *object UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 4026 { |
4027 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
4028 full_screen = FALSE; | |
4029 | |
4030 gui.mainwin = NULL; | |
4031 gui.drawarea = NULL; | |
4032 | |
4033 if (!exiting) /* only do anything if the destroy was unexpected */ | |
4034 { | |
419 | 4035 vim_strncpy(IObuff, |
4036 (char_u *)_("Vim: Main window unexpectedly destroyed\n"), | |
4037 IOSIZE - 1); | |
7 | 4038 preserve_exit(); |
4039 } | |
4040 } | |
4041 | |
791 | 4042 |
4043 /* | |
4044 * Bit of a hack to ensure we start GtkPlug windows with the correct window | |
4045 * hints (and thus the required size from -geom), but that after that we | |
4046 * put the hints back to normal (the actual minimum size) so we may | |
4047 * subsequently be resized smaller. GtkSocket (the parent end) uses the | |
1226 | 4048 * plug's window 'min hints to set *it's* minimum size, but that's also the |
791 | 4049 * only way we have of making ourselves bigger (by set lines/columns). |
4050 * Thus set hints at start-up to ensure correct init. size, then a | |
4051 * second after the final attempt to reset the real minimum hinst (done by | |
1226 | 4052 * scrollbar init.), actually do the standard hinst and stop the timer. |
791 | 4053 * We'll not let the default hints be set while this timer's active. |
4054 */ | |
4055 static gboolean | |
1884 | 4056 check_startup_plug_hints(gpointer data UNUSED) |
791 | 4057 { |
4058 if (init_window_hints_state == 1) | |
4059 { | |
856 | 4060 /* Safe to use normal hints now */ |
4061 init_window_hints_state = 0; | |
4062 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); | |
4063 return FALSE; /* stop timer */ | |
791 | 4064 } |
4065 | |
4066 /* Keep on trying */ | |
4067 init_window_hints_state = 1; | |
4068 return TRUE; | |
4069 } | |
4070 | |
4071 | |
7 | 4072 /* |
4073 * Open the GUI window which was created by a call to gui_mch_init(). | |
4074 */ | |
4075 int | |
4076 gui_mch_open(void) | |
4077 { | |
4078 guicolor_T fg_pixel = INVALCOLOR; | |
4079 guicolor_T bg_pixel = INVALCOLOR; | |
1966 | 4080 guint pixel_width; |
4081 guint pixel_height; | |
7 | 4082 |
4083 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4084 /* | |
4085 * Allow setting a window role on the command line, or invent one | |
4086 * if none was specified. This is mainly useful for GNOME session | |
4087 * support; allowing the WM to restore window placement. | |
4088 */ | |
4089 if (role_argument != NULL) | |
4090 { | |
4091 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role_argument); | |
4092 } | |
4093 else | |
4094 { | |
4095 char *role; | |
4096 | |
4097 /* Invent a unique-enough ID string for the role */ | |
4098 role = g_strdup_printf("vim-%u-%u-%u", | |
4099 (unsigned)mch_get_pid(), | |
4100 (unsigned)g_random_int(), | |
4101 (unsigned)time(NULL)); | |
4102 | |
4103 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role); | |
4104 g_free(role); | |
4105 } | |
4106 #endif | |
4107 | |
4108 if (gui_win_x != -1 && gui_win_y != -1) | |
4109 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4110 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui_win_x, gui_win_y); | |
4111 #else | |
4112 gtk_widget_set_uposition(gui.mainwin, gui_win_x, gui_win_y); | |
4113 #endif | |
4114 | |
4115 /* Determine user specified geometry, if present. */ | |
4116 if (gui.geom != NULL) | |
4117 { | |
4118 int mask; | |
4119 unsigned int w, h; | |
4120 int x = 0; | |
4121 int y = 0; | |
4122 | |
4123 mask = XParseGeometry((char *)gui.geom, &x, &y, &w, &h); | |
4124 | |
4125 if (mask & WidthValue) | |
4126 Columns = w; | |
4127 if (mask & HeightValue) | |
857 | 4128 { |
1884 | 4129 if (p_window > (long)h - 1 || !option_was_set((char_u *)"window")) |
857 | 4130 p_window = h - 1; |
7 | 4131 Rows = h; |
857 | 4132 } |
1426 | 4133 |
4134 pixel_width = (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width); | |
4135 pixel_height = (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height); | |
4136 | |
4137 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4138 pixel_width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
4139 pixel_height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
4140 #endif | |
4141 | |
7 | 4142 if (mask & (XValue | YValue)) |
1426 | 4143 { |
1757 | 4144 int ww, hh; |
4145 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(&ww, &hh); | |
4146 hh += p_ghr + get_menu_tool_height(); | |
4147 ww += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
1426 | 4148 if (mask & XNegative) |
1757 | 4149 x += ww - pixel_width; |
1426 | 4150 if (mask & YNegative) |
1757 | 4151 y += hh - pixel_height; |
7 | 4152 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
4153 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); | |
4154 #else | |
4155 gtk_widget_set_uposition(gui.mainwin, x, y); | |
4156 #endif | |
1426 | 4157 } |
7 | 4158 vim_free(gui.geom); |
4159 gui.geom = NULL; | |
791 | 4160 |
856 | 4161 /* From now until everyone's stopped trying to set the window hints |
4162 * to their correct minimum values, stop them being set as we need | |
4163 * them to remain at our required size for the parent GtkSocket to | |
4164 * give us the right initial size. | |
4165 */ | |
791 | 4166 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && (mask & WidthValue || mask & HeightValue)) |
856 | 4167 { |
4168 update_window_manager_hints(pixel_width, pixel_height); | |
4169 init_window_hints_state = 1; | |
4170 g_timeout_add(1000, check_startup_plug_hints, NULL); | |
4171 } | |
7 | 4172 } |
4173 | |
1966 | 4174 pixel_width = (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width); |
4175 pixel_height = (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height); | |
4176 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4177 /* For GTK2 changing the size of the form widget doesn't cause window | |
4178 * resizing. */ | |
4179 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
4180 gtk_window_resize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), pixel_width, pixel_height); | |
4181 #else | |
4182 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), pixel_width, pixel_height); | |
4183 #endif | |
791 | 4184 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
7 | 4185 |
4186 if (foreground_argument != NULL) | |
4187 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)foreground_argument); | |
4188 if (fg_pixel == INVALCOLOR) | |
4189 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"Black"); | |
4190 | |
4191 if (background_argument != NULL) | |
4192 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)background_argument); | |
4193 if (bg_pixel == INVALCOLOR) | |
4194 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"White"); | |
4195 | |
4196 if (found_reverse_arg) | |
4197 { | |
4198 gui.def_norm_pixel = bg_pixel; | |
4199 gui.def_back_pixel = fg_pixel; | |
4200 } | |
4201 else | |
4202 { | |
4203 gui.def_norm_pixel = fg_pixel; | |
4204 gui.def_back_pixel = bg_pixel; | |
4205 } | |
4206 | |
4207 /* Get the colors from the "Normal" and "Menu" group (set in syntax.c or | |
4208 * in a vimrc file) */ | |
4209 set_normal_colors(); | |
4210 | |
4211 /* Check that none of the colors are the same as the background color */ | |
4212 gui_check_colors(); | |
4213 | |
4214 /* Get the colors for the highlight groups (gui_check_colors() might have | |
4215 * changed them). */ | |
4216 highlight_gui_started(); /* re-init colors and fonts */ | |
4217 | |
4218 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "destroy", | |
4219 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(mainwin_destroy_cb), NULL); | |
4220 | |
4221 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
4222 hangul_keyboard_set(); | |
4223 #endif | |
4224 | |
4225 /* | |
4226 * Notify the fixed area about the need to resize the contents of the | |
4227 * gui.formwin, which we use for random positioning of the included | |
4228 * components. | |
4229 * | |
4230 * We connect this signal deferred finally after anything is in place, | |
4231 * since this is intended to handle resizements coming from the window | |
4232 * manager upon us and should not interfere with what VIM is requesting | |
4233 * upon startup. | |
4234 */ | |
4235 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.formwin), "configure_event", | |
4236 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(form_configure_event), NULL); | |
4237 | |
4238 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
4239 /* | |
4240 * Set up for receiving DND items. | |
4241 */ | |
4242 gtk_drag_dest_set(gui.drawarea, | |
4243 GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL, | |
4244 dnd_targets, N_DND_TARGETS, | |
4245 GDK_ACTION_COPY); | |
4246 | |
4247 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "drag_data_received", | |
4248 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drag_data_received_cb), NULL); | |
4249 #endif | |
4250 | |
4251 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4252 /* With GTK+ 2, we need to iconify the window before calling show() | |
4253 * to avoid mapping the window for a short time. This is just as one | |
4254 * would expect it to work, but it's different in GTK+ 1. The funny | |
4255 * thing is that iconifying after show() _does_ work with GTK+ 1. | |
4256 * (BTW doing this in the "realize" handler makes no difference.) */ | |
4257 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
4258 gui_mch_iconify(); | |
4259 #endif | |
4260 | |
4261 { | |
4262 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU) | |
4263 unsigned long menu_handler = 0; | |
4264 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
4265 unsigned long tool_handler = 0; | |
4266 # endif | |
4267 /* | |
4268 * Urgh hackish :/ For some reason BonoboDockLayout always forces a | |
4269 * show when restoring the saved layout configuration. We can't just | |
4270 * hide the widgets again after gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin) since it's | |
4271 * a toplevel window and thus will be realized immediately. Instead, | |
4272 * connect signal handlers to hide the widgets just after they've been | |
4273 * marked visible, but before the main window is realized. | |
4274 */ | |
4275 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_MENUS) == NULL) | |
4276 menu_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.menubar_h, "show", | |
4277 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide), | |
4278 NULL); | |
4279 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
4280 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) == NULL | |
4281 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))) | |
4282 tool_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.toolbar_h, "show", | |
4283 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide), | |
4284 NULL); | |
4285 # endif | |
4286 #endif | |
4287 gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin); | |
4288 | |
4289 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU) | |
4290 if (menu_handler != 0) | |
4291 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.menubar_h, menu_handler); | |
4292 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
4293 if (tool_handler != 0) | |
4294 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.toolbar_h, tool_handler); | |
4295 # endif | |
4296 #endif | |
4297 } | |
4298 | |
4299 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4300 /* With GTK+ 1, we need to iconify the window after calling show(). | |
4301 * See the comment above for details. */ | |
4302 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
4303 gui_mch_iconify(); | |
4304 #endif | |
4305 | |
4306 return OK; | |
4307 } | |
4308 | |
4309 | |
4310 void | |
1884 | 4311 gui_mch_exit(int rc UNUSED) |
7 | 4312 { |
4313 if (gui.mainwin != NULL) | |
4314 gtk_widget_destroy(gui.mainwin); | |
4315 | |
4316 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
4317 gtk_main_quit(); | |
4318 } | |
4319 | |
4320 /* | |
4321 * Get the position of the top left corner of the window. | |
4322 */ | |
4323 int | |
4324 gui_mch_get_winpos(int *x, int *y) | |
4325 { | |
4326 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4327 gtk_window_get_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); | |
4328 #else | |
4329 /* For some people this must be gdk_window_get_origin() for a correct | |
4330 * result. Where is the documentation! */ | |
4331 gdk_window_get_root_origin(gui.mainwin->window, x, y); | |
4332 #endif | |
4333 return OK; | |
4334 } | |
4335 | |
4336 /* | |
4337 * Set the position of the top left corner of the window to the given | |
4338 * coordinates. | |
4339 */ | |
4340 void | |
4341 gui_mch_set_winpos(int x, int y) | |
4342 { | |
4343 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4344 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); | |
4345 #else | |
4346 gdk_window_move(gui.mainwin->window, x, y); | |
4347 #endif | |
4348 } | |
4349 | |
4350 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4351 #if 0 | |
4352 static int resize_idle_installed = FALSE; | |
4353 /* | |
4354 * Idle handler to force resize. Used by gui_mch_set_shellsize() to ensure | |
4355 * the shell size doesn't exceed the window size, i.e. if the window manager | |
4356 * ignored our size request. Usually this happens if the window is maximized. | |
4357 * | |
4358 * FIXME: It'd be nice if we could find a little more orthodox solution. | |
4359 * See also the remark below in gui_mch_set_shellsize(). | |
4360 * | |
4361 * DISABLED: When doing ":set lines+=1" this function would first invoke | |
4362 * gui_resize_shell() with the old size, then the normal callback would | |
4363 * report the new size through form_configure_event(). That caused the window | |
4364 * layout to be messed up. | |
4365 */ | |
4366 static gboolean | |
4367 force_shell_resize_idle(gpointer data) | |
4368 { | |
4369 if (gui.mainwin != NULL | |
4370 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin) | |
4371 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(gui.mainwin)) | |
4372 { | |
4373 int width; | |
4374 int height; | |
4375 | |
4376 gtk_window_get_size(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), &width, &height); | |
4377 | |
4378 width -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
4379 height -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
4380 | |
4381 gui_resize_shell(width, height); | |
4382 } | |
4383 | |
4384 resize_idle_installed = FALSE; | |
4385 return FALSE; /* don't call me again */ | |
4386 } | |
4387 #endif | |
4388 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4389 | |
1967 | 4390 #if defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO) |
4391 /* | |
4392 * Return TRUE if the main window is maximized. | |
4393 */ | |
4394 int | |
4395 gui_mch_maximized() | |
4396 { | |
4397 return (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL | |
4398 && (gdk_window_get_state(gui.mainwin->window) | |
4399 & GDK_WINDOW_STATE_MAXIMIZED)); | |
4400 } | |
4401 | |
4402 /* | |
4403 * Unmaximize the main window | |
4404 */ | |
4405 void | |
4406 gui_mch_unmaximize() | |
4407 { | |
4408 if (gui.mainwin != NULL) | |
4409 gtk_window_unmaximize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
4410 } | |
4411 #endif | |
4412 | |
7 | 4413 /* |
4414 * Set the windows size. | |
4415 */ | |
4416 void | |
4417 gui_mch_set_shellsize(int width, int height, | |
1884 | 4418 int min_width UNUSED, int min_height UNUSED, |
4419 int base_width UNUSED, int base_height UNUSED, | |
4420 int direction UNUSED) | |
7 | 4421 { |
4422 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4423 /* Hack: When the form already is at the desired size, the window might | |
4424 * have been resized with the mouse. Force a resize by setting a | |
4425 * different size first. */ | |
4426 if (GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)->width == width | |
4427 && GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)->height == height) | |
4428 { | |
4429 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), width + 1, height + 1); | |
4430 gui_mch_update(); | |
4431 } | |
4432 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), width, height); | |
4433 #endif | |
4434 | |
4435 /* give GTK+ a chance to put all widget's into place */ | |
4436 gui_mch_update(); | |
4437 | |
791 | 4438 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 |
7 | 4439 /* this will cause the proper resizement to happen too */ |
791 | 4440 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
4441 | |
2154
7c8c7c95a865
First step in the Vim 7.3 branch. Changed version numbers.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2074
diff
changeset
|
4442 #else |
791 | 4443 /* this will cause the proper resizement to happen too */ |
4444 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
856 | 4445 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
791 | 4446 |
7 | 4447 /* With GTK+ 2, changing the size of the form widget doesn't resize |
791 | 4448 * the window. So let's do it the other way around and resize the |
7 | 4449 * main window instead. */ |
4450 width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
4451 height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
4452 | |
791 | 4453 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) |
856 | 4454 gtk_window_resize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), width, height); |
791 | 4455 else |
856 | 4456 update_window_manager_hints(width, height); |
7 | 4457 |
2154
7c8c7c95a865
First step in the Vim 7.3 branch. Changed version numbers.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2074
diff
changeset
|
4458 # if 0 |
7 | 4459 if (!resize_idle_installed) |
4460 { | |
4461 g_idle_add_full(GDK_PRIORITY_EVENTS + 10, | |
4462 &force_shell_resize_idle, NULL, NULL); | |
4463 resize_idle_installed = TRUE; | |
4464 } | |
2154
7c8c7c95a865
First step in the Vim 7.3 branch. Changed version numbers.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2074
diff
changeset
|
4465 # endif |
7 | 4466 /* |
4467 * Wait until all events are processed to prevent a crash because the | |
4468 * real size of the drawing area doesn't reflect Vim's internal ideas. | |
4469 * | |
4470 * This is a bit of a hack, since Vim is a terminal application with a GUI | |
4471 * on top, while the GUI expects to be the boss. | |
4472 */ | |
4473 gui_mch_update(); | |
4474 #endif | |
4475 } | |
4476 | |
4477 | |
4478 /* | |
4479 * The screen size is used to make sure the initial window doesn't get bigger | |
4480 * than the screen. This subtracts some room for menubar, toolbar and window | |
4481 * decorations. | |
4482 */ | |
4483 void | |
4484 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(int *screen_w, int *screen_h) | |
4485 { | |
4486 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
4487 GdkScreen* screen; | |
4488 | |
4489 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gtk_widget_has_screen(gui.mainwin)) | |
4490 screen = gtk_widget_get_screen(gui.mainwin); | |
4491 else | |
4492 screen = gdk_screen_get_default(); | |
4493 | |
4494 *screen_w = gdk_screen_get_width(screen); | |
4495 *screen_h = gdk_screen_get_height(screen) - p_ghr; | |
4496 #else | |
4497 *screen_w = gdk_screen_width(); | |
4498 /* Subtract 'guiheadroom' from the height to allow some room for the | |
4499 * window manager (task list and window title bar). */ | |
4500 *screen_h = gdk_screen_height() - p_ghr; | |
4501 #endif | |
4502 | |
4503 /* | |
4504 * FIXME: dirty trick: Because the gui_get_base_height() doesn't include | |
4505 * the toolbar and menubar for GTK, we subtract them from the screen | |
4506 * hight, so that the window size can be made to fit on the screen. | |
4507 * This should be completely changed later. | |
4508 */ | |
4509 *screen_w -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
4510 *screen_h -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
4511 } | |
4512 | |
4513 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) || defined(PROTO) | |
4514 void | |
1884 | 4515 gui_mch_settitle(char_u *title, char_u *icon UNUSED) |
7 | 4516 { |
4517 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4518 if (title != NULL && output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
4519 title = string_convert(&output_conv, title, NULL); | |
4520 # endif | |
4521 | |
4522 gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), (const char *)title); | |
4523 | |
4524 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4525 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
4526 vim_free(title); | |
4527 # endif | |
4528 } | |
4529 #endif /* FEAT_TITLE */ | |
4530 | |
4531 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO) | |
4532 void | |
4533 gui_mch_enable_menu(int showit) | |
4534 { | |
4535 GtkWidget *widget; | |
4536 | |
4537 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
4538 if (using_gnome) | |
4539 widget = gui.menubar_h; | |
4540 else | |
4541 # endif | |
4542 widget = gui.menubar; | |
4543 | |
827 | 4544 /* Do not disable the menu while starting up, otherwise F10 doesn't work. */ |
4545 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget) && !gui.starting) | |
7 | 4546 { |
4547 if (showit) | |
4548 gtk_widget_show(widget); | |
4549 else | |
4550 gtk_widget_hide(widget); | |
4551 | |
791 | 4552 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
7 | 4553 } |
4554 } | |
4555 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
4556 | |
4557 #if defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(PROTO) | |
4558 void | |
4559 gui_mch_show_toolbar(int showit) | |
4560 { | |
4561 GtkWidget *widget; | |
4562 | |
4563 if (gui.toolbar == NULL) | |
4564 return; | |
4565 | |
4566 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
4567 if (using_gnome) | |
4568 widget = gui.toolbar_h; | |
4569 else | |
4570 # endif | |
4571 widget = gui.toolbar; | |
4572 | |
4573 if (showit) | |
4574 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
4575 | |
4576 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget)) | |
4577 { | |
4578 if (showit) | |
4579 gtk_widget_show(widget); | |
4580 else | |
4581 gtk_widget_hide(widget); | |
4582 | |
791 | 4583 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
7 | 4584 } |
4585 } | |
4586 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
4587 | |
4588 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4589 /* | |
4590 * Get a font structure for highlighting. | |
4591 * "cbdata" is a pointer to the global gui structure. | |
4592 */ | |
4593 static void | |
4594 font_sel_ok(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata) | |
4595 { | |
4596 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata; | |
4597 GtkFontSelectionDialog *fs = (GtkFontSelectionDialog *)vw->fontdlg; | |
4598 | |
4599 if (vw->fontname) | |
4600 g_free(vw->fontname); | |
4601 | |
4602 vw->fontname = (char_u *)gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name(fs); | |
4603 gtk_widget_hide(vw->fontdlg); | |
4604 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
4605 gtk_main_quit(); | |
4606 } | |
4607 | |
4608 static void | |
4609 font_sel_cancel(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata) | |
4610 { | |
4611 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata; | |
4612 | |
4613 gtk_widget_hide(vw->fontdlg); | |
4614 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
4615 gtk_main_quit(); | |
4616 } | |
4617 | |
4618 static void | |
4619 font_sel_destroy(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata) | |
4620 { | |
4621 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata; | |
4622 | |
4623 vw->fontdlg = NULL; | |
4624 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
4625 gtk_main_quit(); | |
4626 } | |
4627 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4628 | |
4629 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4630 /* | |
4631 * Check if a given font is a CJK font. This is done in a very crude manner. It | |
4632 * just see if U+04E00 for zh and ja and U+AC00 for ko are covered in a given | |
4633 * font. Consequently, this function cannot be used as a general purpose check | |
4634 * for CJK-ness for which fontconfig APIs should be used. This is only used by | |
4635 * gui_mch_init_font() to deal with 'CJK fixed width fonts'. | |
4636 */ | |
4637 static int | |
4638 is_cjk_font(PangoFontDescription *font_desc) | |
4639 { | |
4640 static const char * const cjk_langs[] = | |
4641 {"zh_CN", "zh_TW", "zh_HK", "ja", "ko"}; | |
4642 | |
4643 PangoFont *font; | |
4644 unsigned i; | |
4645 int is_cjk = FALSE; | |
4646 | |
4647 font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font_desc); | |
4648 | |
4649 if (font == NULL) | |
4650 return FALSE; | |
4651 | |
4652 for (i = 0; !is_cjk && i < G_N_ELEMENTS(cjk_langs); ++i) | |
4653 { | |
4654 PangoCoverage *coverage; | |
4655 gunichar uc; | |
4656 | |
4657 coverage = pango_font_get_coverage( | |
4658 font, pango_language_from_string(cjk_langs[i])); | |
4659 | |
4660 if (coverage != NULL) | |
4661 { | |
4662 uc = (cjk_langs[i][0] == 'k') ? 0xAC00 : 0x4E00; | |
4663 is_cjk = (pango_coverage_get(coverage, uc) == PANGO_COVERAGE_EXACT); | |
4664 pango_coverage_unref(coverage); | |
4665 } | |
4666 } | |
4667 | |
4668 g_object_unref(font); | |
4669 | |
4670 return is_cjk; | |
4671 } | |
4672 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4673 | |
445 | 4674 /* |
4675 * Adjust gui.char_height (after 'linespace' was changed). | |
4676 */ | |
7 | 4677 int |
445 | 4678 gui_mch_adjust_charheight(void) |
7 | 4679 { |
4680 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4681 PangoFontMetrics *metrics; | |
4682 int ascent; | |
4683 int descent; | |
4684 | |
4685 metrics = pango_context_get_metrics(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font, | |
4686 pango_context_get_language(gui.text_context)); | |
4687 ascent = pango_font_metrics_get_ascent(metrics); | |
4688 descent = pango_font_metrics_get_descent(metrics); | |
4689 | |
4690 pango_font_metrics_unref(metrics); | |
4691 | |
4692 gui.char_height = (ascent + descent + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE | |
445 | 4693 + p_linespace; |
136 | 4694 /* LINTED: avoid warning: bitwise operation on signed value */ |
7 | 4695 gui.char_ascent = PANGO_PIXELS(ascent + p_linespace * PANGO_SCALE / 2); |
4696 | |
4697 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4698 | |
4699 gui.char_height = gui.current_font->ascent + gui.current_font->descent | |
445 | 4700 + p_linespace; |
7 | 4701 gui.char_ascent = gui.current_font->ascent + p_linespace / 2; |
4702 | |
4703 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4704 | |
4705 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens | |
4706 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */ | |
4707 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0); | |
4708 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1); | |
4709 | |
4710 return OK; | |
4711 } | |
4712 | |
4713 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO) | |
4714 /* | |
4715 * Try to load the requested fontset. | |
4716 */ | |
4717 GuiFontset | |
4718 gui_mch_get_fontset(char_u *name, int report_error, int fixed_width) | |
4719 { | |
4720 GdkFont *font; | |
4721 | |
4722 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL) | |
4723 return NOFONT; | |
4724 | |
4725 font = gdk_fontset_load((gchar *)name); | |
4726 | |
4727 if (font == NULL) | |
4728 { | |
4729 if (report_error) | |
4730 EMSG2(_(e_fontset), name); | |
4731 return NOFONT; | |
4732 } | |
4733 /* TODO: check if the font is fixed width. */ | |
4734 | |
4735 /* reference this font as being in use */ | |
4736 gdk_font_ref(font); | |
4737 | |
4738 return (GuiFontset)font; | |
4739 } | |
4740 #endif /* FEAT_XFONTSET */ | |
4741 | |
4742 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4743 /* | |
4744 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory. | |
4745 * "oldval" is the previous value. | |
4746 * Return NULL when cancelled. | |
4747 */ | |
4748 char_u * | |
4749 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval) | |
4750 { | |
4751 char_u *fontname = NULL; | |
4752 | |
4753 if (!gui.fontdlg) | |
4754 { | |
4755 GtkFontSelectionDialog *fsd = NULL; | |
4756 | |
4757 gui.fontdlg = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(_("Font Selection")); | |
4758 fsd = GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg); | |
4759 gtk_window_set_modal(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), TRUE); | |
4760 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), | |
4761 GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
4762 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.fontdlg), "destroy", | |
4763 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_destroy), &gui); | |
4764 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(fsd->ok_button), "clicked", | |
4765 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_ok), &gui); | |
4766 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(fsd->cancel_button), "clicked", | |
4767 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_cancel), &gui); | |
4768 } | |
4769 | |
4770 if (oldval != NULL && *oldval != NUL) | |
4771 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
4772 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg), (char *)oldval); | |
1959 | 4773 else |
4774 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
4775 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg), DEFAULT_FONT); | |
7 | 4776 |
4777 if (gui.fontname) | |
4778 { | |
4779 g_free(gui.fontname); | |
4780 gui.fontname = NULL; | |
4781 } | |
4782 gtk_window_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), GTK_WIN_POS_MOUSE); | |
4783 gtk_widget_show(gui.fontdlg); | |
4784 { | |
4785 static gchar *spacings[] = {"c", "m", NULL}; | |
4786 | |
4787 /* In GTK 1.2.3 this must be after the gtk_widget_show() call, | |
4788 * otherwise everything is blocked for ten seconds. */ | |
4789 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_filter( | |
4790 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg), | |
4791 GTK_FONT_FILTER_BASE, | |
4792 GTK_FONT_ALL, NULL, NULL, | |
4793 NULL, NULL, spacings, NULL); | |
4794 } | |
4795 | |
4796 /* Wait for the font dialog to be closed. */ | |
4797 while (gui.fontdlg && GTK_WIDGET_DRAWABLE(gui.fontdlg)) | |
4798 gtk_main_iteration_do(TRUE); | |
4799 | |
4800 if (gui.fontname != NULL) | |
4801 { | |
714 | 4802 /* Apparently some font names include a comma, need to escape that, |
4803 * because in 'guifont' it separates names. */ | |
4804 fontname = vim_strsave_escaped(gui.fontname, (char_u *)","); | |
7 | 4805 g_free(gui.fontname); |
4806 gui.fontname = NULL; | |
4807 } | |
4808 return fontname; | |
4809 } | |
4810 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4811 | |
4812 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4813 /* | |
4814 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory. | |
4815 * "oldval" is the previous value. Return NULL when cancelled. | |
4816 * This should probably go into gui_gtk.c. Hmm. | |
4817 * FIXME: | |
4818 * The GTK2 font selection dialog has no filtering API. So we could either | |
4819 * a) implement our own (possibly copying the code from somewhere else) or | |
4820 * b) just live with it. | |
4821 */ | |
4822 char_u * | |
4823 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval) | |
4824 { | |
4825 GtkWidget *dialog; | |
4826 int response; | |
4827 char_u *fontname = NULL; | |
4828 char_u *oldname; | |
4829 | |
4830 dialog = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(NULL); | |
4831 | |
4832 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
4833 gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), TRUE); | |
4834 | |
4835 if (oldval != NULL && oldval[0] != NUL) | |
4836 { | |
4837 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
4838 oldname = string_convert(&output_conv, oldval, NULL); | |
4839 else | |
4840 oldname = oldval; | |
4841 | |
4842 /* Annoying bug in GTK (or Pango): if the font name does not include a | |
4843 * size, zero is used. Use default point size ten. */ | |
4844 if (!vim_isdigit(oldname[STRLEN(oldname) - 1])) | |
4845 { | |
4846 char_u *p = vim_strnsave(oldname, STRLEN(oldname) + 3); | |
4847 | |
4848 if (p != NULL) | |
4849 { | |
4850 STRCPY(p + STRLEN(p), " 10"); | |
4851 if (oldname != oldval) | |
4852 vim_free(oldname); | |
4853 oldname = p; | |
4854 } | |
4855 } | |
4856 | |
4857 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
4858 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog), (const char *)oldname); | |
4859 | |
4860 if (oldname != oldval) | |
100 | 4861 vim_free(oldname); |
7 | 4862 } |
1959 | 4863 else |
4864 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
4865 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog), DEFAULT_FONT); | |
7 | 4866 |
4867 response = gtk_dialog_run(GTK_DIALOG(dialog)); | |
4868 | |
4869 if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_OK) | |
4870 { | |
4871 char *name; | |
4872 | |
4873 name = gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name( | |
4874 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog)); | |
4875 if (name != NULL) | |
4876 { | |
714 | 4877 char_u *p; |
4878 | |
4879 /* Apparently some font names include a comma, need to escape | |
4880 * that, because in 'guifont' it separates names. */ | |
4881 p = vim_strsave_escaped((char_u *)name, (char_u *)","); | |
4882 g_free(name); | |
840 | 4883 if (p != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) |
714 | 4884 { |
4885 fontname = string_convert(&input_conv, p, NULL); | |
4886 vim_free(p); | |
4887 } | |
7 | 4888 else |
714 | 4889 fontname = p; |
7 | 4890 } |
4891 } | |
4892 | |
4893 if (response != GTK_RESPONSE_NONE) | |
4894 gtk_widget_destroy(dialog); | |
4895 | |
4896 return fontname; | |
4897 } | |
4898 | |
4899 /* | |
4900 * Some monospace fonts don't support a bold weight, and fall back | |
4901 * silently to the regular weight. But this is no good since our text | |
4902 * drawing function can emulate bold by overstriking. So let's try | |
4903 * to detect whether bold weight is actually available and emulate it | |
4904 * otherwise. | |
4905 * | |
4906 * Note that we don't need to check for italic style since Xft can | |
4907 * emulate italic on its own, provided you have a proper fontconfig | |
4908 * setup. We wouldn't be able to emulate it in Vim anyway. | |
4909 */ | |
4910 static void | |
4911 get_styled_font_variants(void) | |
4912 { | |
4913 PangoFontDescription *bold_font_desc; | |
4914 PangoFont *plain_font; | |
4915 PangoFont *bold_font; | |
4916 | |
4917 gui.font_can_bold = FALSE; | |
4918 | |
4919 plain_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font); | |
4920 | |
4921 if (plain_font == NULL) | |
4922 return; | |
4923 | |
4924 bold_font_desc = pango_font_description_copy_static(gui.norm_font); | |
4925 pango_font_description_set_weight(bold_font_desc, PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD); | |
4926 | |
4927 bold_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, bold_font_desc); | |
4928 /* | |
4929 * The comparison relies on the unique handle nature of a PangoFont*, | |
4930 * i.e. it's assumed that a different PangoFont* won't refer to the | |
4931 * same font. Seems to work, and failing here isn't critical anyway. | |
4932 */ | |
4933 if (bold_font != NULL) | |
4934 { | |
4935 gui.font_can_bold = (bold_font != plain_font); | |
4936 g_object_unref(bold_font); | |
4937 } | |
4938 | |
4939 pango_font_description_free(bold_font_desc); | |
4940 g_object_unref(plain_font); | |
4941 } | |
4942 | |
4943 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4944 | |
4945 /* | |
4946 * There is only one excuse I can give for the following attempt to manage font | |
4947 * styles: | |
4948 * | |
4949 * I HATE THE BRAIN DEAD WAY X11 IS HANDLING FONTS (--mdcki) | |
4950 * (Me too. --danielk) | |
4951 */ | |
4952 static void | |
4953 get_styled_font_variants(char_u * font_name) | |
4954 { | |
4955 char *chunk[32]; | |
4956 char *sdup; | |
4957 char *tmp; | |
4958 int len, i; | |
4959 GuiFont *styled_font[3]; | |
4960 | |
4961 styled_font[0] = &gui.bold_font; | |
4962 styled_font[1] = &gui.ital_font; | |
4963 styled_font[2] = &gui.boldital_font; | |
4964 | |
1884 | 4965 /* First free whatever was previously there. */ |
7 | 4966 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i) |
4967 if (*styled_font[i]) | |
4968 { | |
4969 gdk_font_unref(*styled_font[i]); | |
4970 *styled_font[i] = NULL; | |
4971 } | |
4972 | |
4973 if ((sdup = g_strdup((const char *)font_name)) == NULL) | |
4974 return; | |
4975 | |
4976 /* split up the whole */ | |
4977 i = 0; | |
4978 for (tmp = sdup; *tmp != '\0'; ++tmp) | |
4979 { | |
4980 if (*tmp == '-') | |
4981 { | |
4982 *tmp = '\0'; | |
4983 | |
4984 if (i == 32) | |
4985 break; | |
4986 | |
4987 chunk[i] = tmp + 1; | |
4988 ++i; | |
4989 } | |
4990 } | |
4991 | |
4992 if (i == 14) | |
4993 { | |
4994 GdkFont *font = NULL; | |
4995 const char *bold_chunk[3] = { "bold", NULL, "bold" }; | |
4996 const char *italic_chunk[3] = { NULL, "o", "o" }; | |
4997 | |
4998 /* font name was complete */ | |
4999 len = strlen((const char *)font_name) + 32; | |
5000 | |
5001 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i) | |
5002 { | |
5003 char *styled_name; | |
5004 int j; | |
5005 | |
5006 styled_name = (char *)alloc(len); | |
5007 if (styled_name == NULL) | |
5008 { | |
5009 g_free(sdup); | |
5010 return; | |
5011 } | |
5012 | |
5013 *styled_name = '\0'; | |
5014 | |
5015 for (j = 0; j < 14; ++j) | |
5016 { | |
5017 strcat(styled_name, "-"); | |
5018 if (j == 2 && bold_chunk[i] != NULL) | |
5019 strcat(styled_name, bold_chunk[i]); | |
5020 else if (j == 3 && italic_chunk[i] != NULL) | |
5021 strcat(styled_name, italic_chunk[i]); | |
5022 else | |
5023 strcat(styled_name, chunk[j]); | |
5024 } | |
5025 | |
5026 font = gui_mch_get_font((char_u *)styled_name, FALSE); | |
5027 if (font != NULL) | |
5028 *styled_font[i] = font; | |
5029 | |
5030 vim_free(styled_name); | |
5031 } | |
5032 } | |
5033 | |
5034 g_free(sdup); | |
5035 } | |
5036 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5037 | |
5038 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5039 static PangoEngineShape *default_shape_engine = NULL; | |
5040 | |
5041 /* | |
5042 * Create a map from ASCII characters in the range [32,126] to glyphs | |
5043 * of the current font. This is used by gui_gtk2_draw_string() to skip | |
5044 * the itemize and shaping process for the most common case. | |
5045 */ | |
5046 static void | |
5047 ascii_glyph_table_init(void) | |
5048 { | |
5049 char_u ascii_chars[128]; | |
5050 PangoAttrList *attr_list; | |
5051 GList *item_list; | |
5052 int i; | |
5053 | |
5054 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
5055 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
5056 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL) | |
5057 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font); | |
5058 | |
5059 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL; | |
5060 gui.ascii_font = NULL; | |
5061 | |
5062 /* For safety, fill in question marks for the control characters. */ | |
5063 for (i = 0; i < 32; ++i) | |
5064 ascii_chars[i] = '?'; | |
5065 for (; i < 127; ++i) | |
5066 ascii_chars[i] = i; | |
5067 ascii_chars[i] = '?'; | |
5068 | |
5069 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new(); | |
5070 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context, (const char *)ascii_chars, | |
5071 0, sizeof(ascii_chars), attr_list, NULL); | |
5072 | |
5073 if (item_list != NULL && item_list->next == NULL) /* play safe */ | |
5074 { | |
5075 PangoItem *item; | |
5076 int width; | |
5077 | |
5078 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data; | |
5079 width = gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
5080 | |
5081 /* Remember the shape engine used for ASCII. */ | |
5082 default_shape_engine = item->analysis.shape_engine; | |
5083 | |
5084 gui.ascii_font = item->analysis.font; | |
5085 g_object_ref(gui.ascii_font); | |
5086 | |
5087 gui.ascii_glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new(); | |
5088 | |
5089 pango_shape((const char *)ascii_chars, sizeof(ascii_chars), | |
5090 &item->analysis, gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
5091 | |
5092 g_return_if_fail(gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs == sizeof(ascii_chars)); | |
5093 | |
5094 for (i = 0; i < gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i) | |
5095 { | |
5096 PangoGlyphGeometry *geom; | |
5097 | |
5098 geom = &gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry; | |
5099 geom->x_offset += MAX(0, width - geom->width) / 2; | |
5100 geom->width = width; | |
5101 } | |
5102 } | |
5103 | |
5104 g_list_foreach(item_list, (GFunc)&pango_item_free, NULL); | |
5105 g_list_free(item_list); | |
5106 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list); | |
5107 } | |
5108 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5109 | |
5110 /* | |
5111 * Initialize Vim to use the font or fontset with the given name. | |
5112 * Return FAIL if the font could not be loaded, OK otherwise. | |
5113 */ | |
5114 int | |
1884 | 5115 gui_mch_init_font(char_u *font_name, int fontset UNUSED) |
7 | 5116 { |
5117 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5118 PangoFontDescription *font_desc; | |
5119 PangoLayout *layout; | |
5120 int width; | |
5121 | |
5122 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should | |
5123 * be present on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations. */ | |
5124 if (font_name == NULL) | |
5125 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT; | |
5126 | |
5127 font_desc = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE); | |
5128 | |
5129 if (font_desc == NULL) | |
5130 return FAIL; | |
5131 | |
5132 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font); | |
5133 gui.norm_font = font_desc; | |
5134 | |
5135 pango_context_set_font_description(gui.text_context, font_desc); | |
5136 | |
5137 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context); | |
5138 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "MW", 2); | |
5139 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL); | |
5140 /* | |
5141 * Set char_width to half the width obtained from pango_layout_get_size() | |
5142 * for CJK fixed_width/bi-width fonts. An unpatched version of Xft leads | |
5143 * Pango to use the same width for both non-CJK characters (e.g. Latin | |
5144 * letters and numbers) and CJK characters. This results in 's p a c e d | |
5145 * o u t' rendering when a CJK 'fixed width' font is used. To work around | |
5146 * that, divide the width returned by Pango by 2 if cjk_width is equal to | |
5147 * width for CJK fonts. | |
5148 * | |
5149 * For related bugs, see: | |
5150 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106618 | |
5151 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106624 | |
5152 * | |
5153 * With this, for all four of the following cases, Vim works fine: | |
5154 * guifont=CJK_fixed_width_font | |
5155 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font | |
5156 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font,CJK_Fixed_font | |
5157 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font guifontwide=CJK_fixed_font | |
5158 */ | |
5159 if (is_cjk_font(gui.norm_font)) | |
5160 { | |
5161 int cjk_width; | |
5162 | |
5163 /* Measure the text extent of U+4E00 and U+4E8C */ | |
5164 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "\344\270\200\344\272\214", -1); | |
5165 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &cjk_width, NULL); | |
5166 | |
5167 if (width == cjk_width) /* Xft not patched */ | |
5168 width /= 2; | |
5169 } | |
5170 g_object_unref(layout); | |
5171 | |
5172 gui.char_width = (width / 2 + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE; | |
5173 | |
5174 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */ | |
5175 if (gui.char_width <= 0) | |
5176 gui.char_width = 8; | |
5177 | |
445 | 5178 gui_mch_adjust_charheight(); |
7 | 5179 |
5180 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */ | |
5181 hl_set_font_name(font_name); | |
5182 | |
5183 get_styled_font_variants(); | |
5184 ascii_glyph_table_init(); | |
5185 | |
5186 /* Avoid unnecessary overhead if 'guifontwide' is equal to 'guifont'. */ | |
5187 if (gui.wide_font != NULL | |
5188 && pango_font_description_equal(gui.norm_font, gui.wide_font)) | |
5189 { | |
5190 pango_font_description_free(gui.wide_font); | |
5191 gui.wide_font = NULL; | |
5192 } | |
5193 | |
5194 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5195 | |
5196 GdkFont *font = NULL; | |
5197 | |
5198 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
5199 /* Try loading a fontset. If this fails we try loading a normal font. */ | |
5200 if (fontset && font_name != NULL) | |
5201 font = gui_mch_get_fontset(font_name, TRUE, TRUE); | |
5202 | |
5203 if (font == NULL) | |
5204 # endif | |
5205 { | |
5206 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should | |
5207 * be present on all X11 servers. */ | |
5208 if (font_name == NULL) | |
5209 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT; | |
5210 font = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE); | |
5211 } | |
5212 | |
5213 if (font == NULL) | |
5214 return FAIL; | |
5215 | |
5216 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font); | |
5217 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
5218 gui_mch_free_fontset(gui.fontset); | |
5219 if (font->type == GDK_FONT_FONTSET) | |
5220 { | |
5221 gui.norm_font = NOFONT; | |
5222 gui.fontset = (GuiFontset)font; | |
5223 /* Use two bytes, this works around the problem that the result would | |
5224 * be zero if no 8-bit font was found. */ | |
5225 gui.char_width = gdk_string_width(font, "xW") / 2; | |
5226 } | |
5227 else | |
5228 # endif | |
5229 { | |
5230 gui.norm_font = font; | |
5231 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
5232 gui.fontset = NOFONTSET; | |
5233 # endif | |
5234 gui.char_width = ((XFontStruct *) | |
5235 GDK_FONT_XFONT(font))->max_bounds.width; | |
5236 } | |
5237 | |
5238 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */ | |
5239 if (gui.char_width <= 0) | |
5240 gui.char_width = 8; | |
5241 | |
5242 gui.char_height = font->ascent + font->descent + p_linespace; | |
5243 gui.char_ascent = font->ascent + p_linespace / 2; | |
5244 | |
5245 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens | |
5246 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */ | |
5247 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0); | |
5248 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1); | |
5249 | |
5250 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */ | |
5251 hl_set_font_name(font_name); | |
5252 | |
5253 if (font->type != GDK_FONT_FONTSET) | |
5254 get_styled_font_variants(font_name); | |
5255 | |
5256 /* Synchronize the fonts used in user input dialogs, since otherwise | |
5257 * search/replace will be esp. annoying in case of international font | |
5258 * usage. | |
5259 */ | |
5260 gui_gtk_synch_fonts(); | |
5261 | |
5262 # ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
5263 /* Adjust input management behaviour to the capabilities of the new | |
5264 * fontset */ | |
5265 xim_decide_input_style(); | |
5266 if (xim_get_status_area_height()) | |
5267 { | |
5268 /* Status area is required. Just create the empty container so that | |
5269 * mainwin will allocate the extra space for status area. */ | |
5270 GtkWidget *alignment = gtk_alignment_new((gfloat)0.5, (gfloat)0.5, | |
5271 (gfloat)1.0, (gfloat)1.0); | |
5272 | |
5273 gtk_widget_set_usize(alignment, 20, gui.char_height + 2); | |
5274 gtk_box_pack_end(GTK_BOX(GTK_BIN(gui.mainwin)->child), | |
5275 alignment, FALSE, FALSE, 0); | |
5276 gtk_widget_show(alignment); | |
5277 } | |
5278 # endif | |
5279 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5280 | |
1986 | 5281 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
5282 if (gui_mch_maximized()) | |
5283 { | |
5284 int w, h; | |
5285 | |
5286 /* Update lines and columns in accordance with the new font, keep the | |
5287 * window maximized. */ | |
5288 gtk_window_get_size(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), &w, &h); | |
5289 w -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
5290 h -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
5291 gui_resize_shell(w, h); | |
5292 } | |
5293 else | |
5294 #endif | |
5295 { | |
5296 /* Preserve the logical dimensions of the screen. */ | |
5297 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); | |
5298 } | |
7 | 5299 |
5300 return OK; | |
5301 } | |
5302 | |
5303 /* | |
5304 * Get a reference to the font "name". | |
5305 * Return zero for failure. | |
5306 */ | |
5307 GuiFont | |
5308 gui_mch_get_font(char_u *name, int report_error) | |
5309 { | |
5310 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5311 PangoFontDescription *font; | |
5312 #else | |
5313 GdkFont *font; | |
5314 #endif | |
5315 | |
5316 /* can't do this when GUI is not running */ | |
5317 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL) | |
5318 return NULL; | |
5319 | |
5320 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5321 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
5322 { | |
5323 char_u *buf; | |
5324 | |
5325 buf = string_convert(&output_conv, name, NULL); | |
5326 if (buf != NULL) | |
5327 { | |
5328 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)buf); | |
5329 vim_free(buf); | |
5330 } | |
5331 else | |
5332 font = NULL; | |
5333 } | |
5334 else | |
5335 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)name); | |
5336 | |
5337 if (font != NULL) | |
5338 { | |
5339 PangoFont *real_font; | |
5340 | |
5341 /* pango_context_load_font() bails out if no font size is set */ | |
5342 if (pango_font_description_get_size(font) <= 0) | |
5343 pango_font_description_set_size(font, 10 * PANGO_SCALE); | |
5344 | |
5345 real_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font); | |
5346 | |
5347 if (real_font == NULL) | |
5348 { | |
5349 pango_font_description_free(font); | |
5350 font = NULL; | |
5351 } | |
5352 else | |
5353 g_object_unref(real_font); | |
5354 } | |
5355 #else | |
5356 font = gdk_font_load((const gchar *)name); | |
5357 #endif | |
5358 | |
5359 if (font == NULL) | |
5360 { | |
5361 if (report_error) | |
1666 | 5362 EMSG2(_((char *)e_font), name); |
7 | 5363 return NULL; |
5364 } | |
5365 | |
5366 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5367 /* | |
5368 * The fixed-width check has been disabled for GTK+ 2. Rationale: | |
5369 * | |
5370 * - The check tends to report false positives, particularly | |
5371 * in non-Latin locales or with old X fonts. | |
5372 * - Thanks to our fixed-width hack in gui_gtk2_draw_string(), | |
5373 * GTK+ 2 Vim is actually capable of displaying variable width | |
5374 * fonts. Those will just be spaced out like in AA xterm. | |
5375 * - Failing here for the default font causes GUI startup to fail | |
5376 * even with wiped out configuration files. | |
5377 * - The font dialog displays all fonts unfiltered, and it's rather | |
5378 * annoying if 95% of the listed fonts produce an error message. | |
5379 */ | |
5380 # if 0 | |
5381 { | |
5382 /* Check that this is a mono-spaced font. Naturally, this is a bit | |
5383 * hackish -- fixed-width isn't really suitable for i18n text :/ */ | |
5384 PangoLayout *layout; | |
5385 unsigned int i; | |
5386 int last_width = -1; | |
5387 const char test_chars[] = { 'W', 'i', ',', 'x' }; /* arbitrary */ | |
5388 | |
5389 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context); | |
5390 pango_layout_set_font_description(layout, font); | |
5391 | |
5392 for (i = 0; i < G_N_ELEMENTS(test_chars); ++i) | |
5393 { | |
5394 int width; | |
5395 | |
5396 pango_layout_set_text(layout, &test_chars[i], 1); | |
5397 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL); | |
5398 | |
5399 if (last_width >= 0 && width != last_width) | |
5400 { | |
5401 pango_font_description_free(font); | |
5402 font = NULL; | |
5403 break; | |
5404 } | |
5405 | |
5406 last_width = width; | |
5407 } | |
5408 | |
5409 g_object_unref(layout); | |
5410 } | |
5411 # endif | |
5412 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5413 { | |
5414 XFontStruct *xfont; | |
5415 | |
5416 /* reference this font as being in use */ | |
5417 gdk_font_ref(font); | |
5418 | |
5419 /* Check that this is a mono-spaced font. | |
5420 */ | |
5421 xfont = (XFontStruct *) GDK_FONT_XFONT(font); | |
5422 | |
5423 if (xfont->max_bounds.width != xfont->min_bounds.width) | |
5424 { | |
5425 gdk_font_unref(font); | |
5426 font = NULL; | |
5427 } | |
5428 } | |
5429 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5430 | |
5431 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || 0 /* disabled for GTK+ 2, see above */ | |
5432 if (font == NULL && report_error) | |
5433 EMSG2(_(e_fontwidth), name); | |
5434 #endif | |
5435 | |
5436 return font; | |
5437 } | |
5438 | |
39 | 5439 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) |
38 | 5440 /* |
5441 * Return the name of font "font" in allocated memory. | |
5442 */ | |
5443 char_u * | |
1884 | 5444 gui_mch_get_fontname(GuiFont font, char_u *name UNUSED) |
38 | 5445 { |
39 | 5446 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
38 | 5447 if (font != NOFONT) |
5448 { | |
944 | 5449 char *pangoname = pango_font_description_to_string(font); |
5450 | |
5451 if (pangoname != NULL) | |
38 | 5452 { |
944 | 5453 char_u *s = vim_strsave((char_u *)pangoname); |
5454 | |
5455 g_free(pangoname); | |
38 | 5456 return s; |
5457 } | |
5458 } | |
39 | 5459 # else |
38 | 5460 /* Don't know how to get the name, return what we got. */ |
5461 if (name != NULL) | |
5462 return vim_strsave(name); | |
39 | 5463 # endif |
38 | 5464 return NULL; |
5465 } | |
39 | 5466 #endif |
38 | 5467 |
7 | 5468 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO) |
5469 /* | |
5470 * Set the current text font. | |
5471 * Since we create all GC on demand, we use just gui.current_font to | |
5472 * indicate the desired current font. | |
5473 */ | |
5474 void | |
5475 gui_mch_set_font(GuiFont font) | |
5476 { | |
5477 gui.current_font = font; | |
5478 } | |
5479 #endif | |
5480 | |
5481 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO) | |
5482 /* | |
5483 * Set the current text fontset. | |
5484 */ | |
5485 void | |
5486 gui_mch_set_fontset(GuiFontset fontset) | |
5487 { | |
5488 gui.current_font = fontset; | |
5489 } | |
5490 #endif | |
5491 | |
5492 /* | |
5493 * If a font is not going to be used, free its structure. | |
5494 */ | |
5495 void | |
5496 gui_mch_free_font(GuiFont font) | |
5497 { | |
5498 if (font != NOFONT) | |
5499 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5500 pango_font_description_free(font); | |
5501 #else | |
5502 gdk_font_unref(font); | |
5503 #endif | |
5504 } | |
5505 | |
5506 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO) | |
5507 /* | |
5508 * If a fontset is not going to be used, free its structure. | |
5509 */ | |
5510 void | |
5511 gui_mch_free_fontset(GuiFontset fontset) | |
5512 { | |
5513 if (fontset != NOFONTSET) | |
5514 gdk_font_unref(fontset); | |
5515 } | |
5516 #endif | |
5517 | |
5518 | |
5519 /* | |
5520 * Return the Pixel value (color) for the given color name. This routine was | |
5521 * pretty much taken from example code in the Silicon Graphics OSF/Motif | |
5522 * Programmer's Guide. | |
5523 * Return INVALCOLOR for error. | |
5524 */ | |
5525 guicolor_T | |
5526 gui_mch_get_color(char_u *name) | |
5527 { | |
5528 /* A number of colors that some X11 systems don't have */ | |
5529 static const char *const vimnames[][2] = | |
5530 { | |
834 | 5531 {"LightRed", "#FFBBBB"}, |
5532 {"LightGreen", "#88FF88"}, | |
5533 {"LightMagenta","#FFBBFF"}, | |
5534 {"DarkCyan", "#008888"}, | |
5535 {"DarkBlue", "#0000BB"}, | |
5536 {"DarkRed", "#BB0000"}, | |
5537 {"DarkMagenta", "#BB00BB"}, | |
5538 {"DarkGrey", "#BBBBBB"}, | |
5539 {"DarkYellow", "#BBBB00"}, | |
5540 {"Gray10", "#1A1A1A"}, | |
5541 {"Grey10", "#1A1A1A"}, | |
5542 {"Gray20", "#333333"}, | |
5543 {"Grey20", "#333333"}, | |
5544 {"Gray30", "#4D4D4D"}, | |
5545 {"Grey30", "#4D4D4D"}, | |
5546 {"Gray40", "#666666"}, | |
5547 {"Grey40", "#666666"}, | |
5548 {"Gray50", "#7F7F7F"}, | |
5549 {"Grey50", "#7F7F7F"}, | |
5550 {"Gray60", "#999999"}, | |
5551 {"Grey60", "#999999"}, | |
5552 {"Gray70", "#B3B3B3"}, | |
5553 {"Grey70", "#B3B3B3"}, | |
5554 {"Gray80", "#CCCCCC"}, | |
5555 {"Grey80", "#CCCCCC"}, | |
5556 {"Gray90", "#E5E5E5"}, | |
5557 {"Grey90", "#E5E5E5"}, | |
7 | 5558 {NULL, NULL} |
5559 }; | |
5560 | |
5561 if (!gui.in_use) /* can't do this when GUI not running */ | |
5562 return INVALCOLOR; | |
5563 | |
5564 while (name != NULL) | |
5565 { | |
5566 GdkColor color; | |
5567 int parsed; | |
5568 int i; | |
5569 | |
5570 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const char *)name, &color); | |
5571 | |
5572 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* ohh, lovely GTK+ 2, eases our pain :) */ | |
5573 /* | |
5574 * Since we have already called gtk_set_locale here the bugger | |
5575 * XParseColor will accept only explicit color names in the language | |
1226 | 5576 * of the current locale. However this will interfere with: |
7 | 5577 * 1. Vim's global startup files |
5578 * 2. Explicit color names in .vimrc | |
5579 * | |
5580 * Therefore we first try to parse the color in the current locale and | |
5581 * if it fails, we fall back to the portable "C" one. | |
5582 */ | |
5583 if (!parsed) | |
5584 { | |
5585 char *current; | |
5586 | |
5587 current = setlocale(LC_ALL, NULL); | |
5588 if (current != NULL) | |
5589 { | |
5590 char *saved; | |
5591 | |
5592 saved = g_strdup(current); | |
5593 setlocale(LC_ALL, "C"); | |
5594 | |
5595 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const gchar *)name, &color); | |
5596 | |
5597 setlocale(LC_ALL, saved); | |
5598 gtk_set_locale(); | |
5599 | |
5600 g_free(saved); | |
5601 } | |
5602 } | |
5603 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5604 | |
5605 if (parsed) | |
5606 { | |
5607 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5608 gdk_colormap_alloc_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), | |
5609 &color, FALSE, TRUE); | |
5610 #else | |
5611 gdk_color_alloc(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), &color); | |
5612 #endif | |
5613 return (guicolor_T)color.pixel; | |
5614 } | |
5615 /* add a few builtin names and try again */ | |
5616 for (i = 0; ; ++i) | |
5617 { | |
5618 if (vimnames[i][0] == NULL) | |
5619 { | |
5620 name = NULL; | |
5621 break; | |
5622 } | |
5623 if (STRICMP(name, vimnames[i][0]) == 0) | |
5624 { | |
5625 name = (char_u *)vimnames[i][1]; | |
5626 break; | |
5627 } | |
5628 } | |
5629 } | |
5630 | |
5631 return INVALCOLOR; | |
5632 } | |
5633 | |
5634 /* | |
5635 * Set the current text foreground color. | |
5636 */ | |
5637 void | |
5638 gui_mch_set_fg_color(guicolor_T color) | |
5639 { | |
5640 gui.fgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
5641 } | |
5642 | |
5643 /* | |
5644 * Set the current text background color. | |
5645 */ | |
5646 void | |
5647 gui_mch_set_bg_color(guicolor_T color) | |
5648 { | |
5649 gui.bgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
5650 } | |
5651 | |
207 | 5652 /* |
5653 * Set the current text special color. | |
5654 */ | |
5655 void | |
5656 gui_mch_set_sp_color(guicolor_T color) | |
5657 { | |
5658 gui.spcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
5659 } | |
5660 | |
7 | 5661 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
5662 /* | |
5663 * Function-like convenience macro for the sake of efficiency. | |
5664 */ | |
5665 #define INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(Attribute, AttrList, Start, End) \ | |
5666 G_STMT_START{ \ | |
5667 PangoAttribute *tmp_attr_; \ | |
5668 tmp_attr_ = (Attribute); \ | |
5669 tmp_attr_->start_index = (Start); \ | |
5670 tmp_attr_->end_index = (End); \ | |
5671 pango_attr_list_insert((AttrList), tmp_attr_); \ | |
5672 }G_STMT_END | |
5673 | |
5674 static void | |
5675 apply_wide_font_attr(char_u *s, int len, PangoAttrList *attr_list) | |
5676 { | |
5677 char_u *start = NULL; | |
5678 char_u *p; | |
5679 int uc; | |
5680 | |
5681 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += utf_byte2len(*p)) | |
5682 { | |
5683 uc = utf_ptr2char(p); | |
5684 | |
5685 if (start == NULL) | |
5686 { | |
5687 if (uc >= 0x80 && utf_char2cells(uc) == 2) | |
5688 start = p; | |
5689 } | |
5690 else if (uc < 0x80 /* optimization shortcut */ | |
5691 || (utf_char2cells(uc) != 2 && !utf_iscomposing(uc))) | |
5692 { | |
5693 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font), | |
5694 attr_list, start - s, p - s); | |
5695 start = NULL; | |
5696 } | |
5697 } | |
5698 | |
5699 if (start != NULL) | |
5700 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font), | |
5701 attr_list, start - s, len); | |
5702 } | |
5703 | |
5704 static int | |
5705 count_cluster_cells(char_u *s, PangoItem *item, | |
5706 PangoGlyphString* glyphs, int i, | |
5707 int *cluster_width, | |
5708 int *last_glyph_rbearing) | |
5709 { | |
5710 char_u *p; | |
5711 int next; /* glyph start index of next cluster */ | |
5712 int start, end; /* string segment of current cluster */ | |
5713 int width; /* real cluster width in Pango units */ | |
5714 int uc; | |
5715 int cellcount = 0; | |
5716 | |
5717 width = glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry.width; | |
5718 | |
5719 for (next = i + 1; next < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++next) | |
5720 { | |
5721 if (glyphs->glyphs[next].attr.is_cluster_start) | |
5722 break; | |
5723 else if (glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width > width) | |
5724 width = glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width; | |
5725 } | |
5726 | |
5727 start = item->offset + glyphs->log_clusters[i]; | |
5728 end = item->offset + ((next < glyphs->num_glyphs) ? | |
5729 glyphs->log_clusters[next] : item->length); | |
5730 | |
5731 for (p = s + start; p < s + end; p += utf_byte2len(*p)) | |
5732 { | |
5733 uc = utf_ptr2char(p); | |
5734 if (uc < 0x80) | |
5735 ++cellcount; | |
5736 else if (!utf_iscomposing(uc)) | |
5737 cellcount += utf_char2cells(uc); | |
5738 } | |
5739 | |
5740 if (last_glyph_rbearing != NULL | |
5741 && cellcount > 0 && next == glyphs->num_glyphs) | |
5742 { | |
5743 PangoRectangle ink_rect; | |
5744 /* | |
5745 * If a certain combining mark had to be taken from a non-monospace | |
5746 * font, we have to compensate manually by adapting x_offset according | |
5747 * to the ink extents of the previous glyph. | |
5748 */ | |
5749 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font, | |
5750 glyphs->glyphs[i].glyph, | |
5751 &ink_rect, NULL); | |
5752 | |
5753 if (PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect) > 0) | |
5754 *last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect); | |
5755 } | |
5756 | |
5757 if (cellcount > 0) | |
5758 *cluster_width = width; | |
5759 | |
5760 return cellcount; | |
5761 } | |
5762 | |
5763 /* | |
5764 * If there are only combining characters in the cluster, we cannot just | |
5765 * change the width of the previous glyph since there is none. Therefore | |
5766 * some guesswork is needed. | |
5767 * | |
5768 * If ink_rect.x is negative Pango apparently has taken care of the composing | |
5769 * by itself. Actually setting x_offset = 0 should be sufficient then, but due | |
5770 * to problems with composing from different fonts we still need to fine-tune | |
5771 * x_offset to avoid uglyness. | |
5772 * | |
5773 * If ink_rect.x is not negative, force overstriking by pointing x_offset to | |
5774 * the position of the previous glyph. Apparently this happens only with old | |
5775 * X fonts which don't provide the special combining information needed by | |
5776 * Pango. | |
5777 */ | |
5778 static void | |
5779 setup_zero_width_cluster(PangoItem *item, PangoGlyphInfo *glyph, | |
5780 int last_cellcount, int last_cluster_width, | |
5781 int last_glyph_rbearing) | |
5782 { | |
5783 PangoRectangle ink_rect; | |
5784 PangoRectangle logical_rect; | |
5785 int width; | |
5786 | |
5787 width = last_cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
5788 glyph->geometry.x_offset = -width + MAX(0, width - last_cluster_width) / 2; | |
5789 glyph->geometry.width = 0; | |
5790 | |
5791 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font, | |
5792 glyph->glyph, | |
5793 &ink_rect, &logical_rect); | |
5794 if (ink_rect.x < 0) | |
5795 { | |
5796 glyph->geometry.x_offset += last_glyph_rbearing; | |
5797 glyph->geometry.y_offset = logical_rect.height | |
5798 - (gui.char_height - p_linespace) * PANGO_SCALE; | |
5799 } | |
5800 } | |
5801 | |
5802 static void | |
5803 draw_glyph_string(int row, int col, int num_cells, int flags, | |
5804 PangoFont *font, PangoGlyphString *glyphs) | |
5805 { | |
5806 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP)) | |
5807 { | |
5808 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
5809 | |
5810 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
5811 gui.text_gc, | |
5812 TRUE, | |
5813 FILL_X(col), | |
5814 FILL_Y(row), | |
5815 num_cells * gui.char_width, | |
5816 gui.char_height); | |
5817 } | |
5818 | |
5819 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
5820 | |
5821 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window, | |
5822 gui.text_gc, | |
5823 font, | |
5824 TEXT_X(col), | |
5825 TEXT_Y(row), | |
5826 glyphs); | |
5827 | |
5828 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */ | |
5829 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && !gui.font_can_bold) | |
5830 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window, | |
5831 gui.text_gc, | |
5832 font, | |
5833 TEXT_X(col) + 1, | |
5834 TEXT_Y(row), | |
5835 glyphs); | |
5836 } | |
5837 | |
5838 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5839 | |
207 | 5840 /* |
5841 * Draw underline and undercurl at the bottom of the character cell. | |
5842 */ | |
5843 static void | |
5844 draw_under(int flags, int row, int col, int cells) | |
5845 { | |
5846 int i; | |
5847 int offset; | |
1884 | 5848 static const int val[8] = {1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 2, 2 }; |
207 | 5849 int y = FILL_Y(row + 1) - 1; |
5850 | |
5851 /* Undercurl: draw curl at the bottom of the character cell. */ | |
5852 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERC) | |
5853 { | |
5854 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.spcolor); | |
5855 for (i = FILL_X(col); i < FILL_X(col + cells); ++i) | |
5856 { | |
5857 offset = val[i % 8]; | |
5858 gdk_draw_point(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, i, y - offset); | |
5859 } | |
5860 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
5861 } | |
5862 | |
5863 /* Underline: draw a line at the bottom of the character cell. */ | |
5864 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERL) | |
5865 { | |
5866 /* When p_linespace is 0, overwrite the bottom row of pixels. | |
5867 * Otherwise put the line just below the character. */ | |
5868 if (p_linespace > 1) | |
5869 y -= p_linespace - 1; | |
5870 gdk_draw_line(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
5871 FILL_X(col), y, | |
5872 FILL_X(col + cells) - 1, y); | |
5873 } | |
5874 } | |
5875 | |
7 | 5876 #if defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO) |
5877 int | |
5878 gui_gtk2_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags) | |
5879 { | |
5880 GdkRectangle area; /* area for clip mask */ | |
5881 PangoGlyphString *glyphs; /* glyphs of current item */ | |
5882 int column_offset = 0; /* column offset in cells */ | |
5883 int i; | |
5884 char_u *conv_buf = NULL; /* result of UTF-8 conversion */ | |
5885 char_u *new_conv_buf; | |
5886 int convlen; | |
5887 char_u *sp, *bp; | |
5888 int plen; | |
5889 | |
5890 if (gui.text_context == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
5891 return len; | |
5892 | |
5893 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
5894 { | |
5895 /* | |
5896 * Convert characters from 'encoding' to 'termencoding', which is set | |
5897 * to UTF-8 by gui_mch_init(). did_set_string_option() in option.c | |
5898 * prohibits changing this to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is | |
5899 * in use. | |
5900 */ | |
5901 convlen = len; | |
5902 conv_buf = string_convert(&output_conv, s, &convlen); | |
5903 g_return_val_if_fail(conv_buf != NULL, len); | |
5904 | |
5905 /* Correct for differences in char width: some chars are | |
5906 * double-wide in 'encoding' but single-wide in utf-8. Add a space to | |
5907 * compensate for that. */ | |
5908 for (sp = s, bp = conv_buf; sp < s + len && bp < conv_buf + convlen; ) | |
5909 { | |
474 | 5910 plen = utf_ptr2len(bp); |
7 | 5911 if ((*mb_ptr2cells)(sp) == 2 && utf_ptr2cells(bp) == 1) |
5912 { | |
5913 new_conv_buf = alloc(convlen + 2); | |
5914 if (new_conv_buf == NULL) | |
5915 return len; | |
5916 plen += bp - conv_buf; | |
5917 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf, conv_buf, plen); | |
5918 new_conv_buf[plen] = ' '; | |
5919 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf + plen + 1, conv_buf + plen, | |
5920 convlen - plen + 1); | |
5921 vim_free(conv_buf); | |
5922 conv_buf = new_conv_buf; | |
5923 ++convlen; | |
5924 bp = conv_buf + plen; | |
5925 plen = 1; | |
5926 } | |
474 | 5927 sp += (*mb_ptr2len)(sp); |
7 | 5928 bp += plen; |
5929 } | |
5930 s = conv_buf; | |
5931 len = convlen; | |
5932 } | |
5933 | |
5934 /* | |
5935 * Restrict all drawing to the current screen line in order to prevent | |
5936 * fuzzy font lookups from messing up the screen. | |
5937 */ | |
5938 area.x = gui.border_offset; | |
5939 area.y = FILL_Y(row); | |
5940 area.width = gui.num_cols * gui.char_width; | |
5941 area.height = gui.char_height; | |
5942 | |
5943 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc, 0, 0); | |
5944 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, &area); | |
5945 | |
5946 glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new(); | |
5947 | |
5948 /* | |
5949 * Optimization hack: If possible, skip the itemize and shaping process | |
5950 * for pure ASCII strings. This optimization is particularly effective | |
5951 * because Vim draws space characters to clear parts of the screen. | |
5952 */ | |
5953 if (!(flags & DRAW_ITALIC) | |
5954 && !((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold) | |
5955 && gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
5956 { | |
5957 char_u *p; | |
5958 | |
5959 for (p = s; p < s + len; ++p) | |
5960 if (*p & 0x80) | |
5961 goto not_ascii; | |
5962 | |
5963 pango_glyph_string_set_size(glyphs, len); | |
5964 | |
5965 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
5966 { | |
5967 glyphs->glyphs[i] = gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[s[i]]; | |
5968 glyphs->log_clusters[i] = i; | |
5969 } | |
5970 | |
5971 draw_glyph_string(row, col, len, flags, gui.ascii_font, glyphs); | |
5972 | |
5973 column_offset = len; | |
5974 } | |
5975 else | |
5976 not_ascii: | |
5977 { | |
5978 PangoAttrList *attr_list; | |
5979 GList *item_list; | |
5980 int cluster_width; | |
5981 int last_glyph_rbearing; | |
5982 int cells = 0; /* cells occupied by current cluster */ | |
497 | 5983 #if 0 |
5984 int monospace13 = STRICMP(p_guifont, "monospace 13") == 0; | |
5985 #endif | |
7 | 5986 |
26 | 5987 /* Safety check: pango crashes when invoked with invalid utf-8 |
5988 * characters. */ | |
5989 if (!utf_valid_string(s, s + len)) | |
5990 { | |
5991 column_offset = len; | |
5992 goto skipitall; | |
5993 } | |
5994 | |
7 | 5995 /* original width of the current cluster */ |
5996 cluster_width = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width; | |
5997 | |
5998 /* right bearing of the last non-composing glyph */ | |
5999 last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width; | |
6000 | |
6001 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new(); | |
6002 | |
6003 /* If 'guifontwide' is set then use that for double-width characters. | |
6004 * Otherwise just go with 'guifont' and let Pango do its thing. */ | |
6005 if (gui.wide_font != NULL) | |
6006 apply_wide_font_attr(s, len, attr_list); | |
6007 | |
6008 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold) | |
6009 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_weight_new(PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD), | |
6010 attr_list, 0, len); | |
6011 if (flags & DRAW_ITALIC) | |
6012 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_style_new(PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC), | |
6013 attr_list, 0, len); | |
6014 /* | |
6015 * Break the text into segments with consistent directional level | |
6016 * and shaping engine. Pure Latin text needs only a single segment, | |
6017 * so there's no need to worry about the loop's efficiency. Better | |
6018 * try to optimize elsewhere, e.g. reducing exposes and stuff :) | |
6019 */ | |
6020 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context, | |
6021 (const char *)s, 0, len, attr_list, NULL); | |
6022 | |
6023 while (item_list != NULL) | |
6024 { | |
6025 PangoItem *item; | |
6026 int item_cells = 0; /* item length in cells */ | |
6027 | |
6028 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data; | |
6029 item_list = g_list_delete_link(item_list, item_list); | |
6030 /* | |
6031 * Increment the bidirectional embedding level by 1 if it is not | |
6032 * even. An odd number means the output will be RTL, but we don't | |
6033 * want that since Vim handles right-to-left text on its own. It | |
6034 * would probably be sufficient to just set level = 0, but you can | |
6035 * never know :) | |
6036 * | |
6037 * Unfortunately we can't take advantage of Pango's ability to | |
6038 * render both LTR and RTL at the same time. In order to support | |
6039 * that, Vim's main screen engine would have to make use of Pango | |
6040 * functionality. | |
6041 */ | |
6042 item->analysis.level = (item->analysis.level + 1) & (~1U); | |
6043 | |
6044 /* HACK: Overrule the shape engine, we don't want shaping to be | |
6045 * done, because drawing the cursor would change the display. */ | |
6046 item->analysis.shape_engine = default_shape_engine; | |
6047 | |
6048 pango_shape((const char *)s + item->offset, item->length, | |
6049 &item->analysis, glyphs); | |
6050 /* | |
6051 * Fixed-width hack: iterate over the array and assign a fixed | |
6052 * width to each glyph, thus overriding the choice made by the | |
6053 * shaping engine. We use utf_char2cells() to determine the | |
6054 * number of cells needed. | |
6055 * | |
6056 * Also perform all kind of dark magic to get composing | |
6057 * characters right (and pretty too of course). | |
6058 */ | |
6059 for (i = 0; i < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i) | |
6060 { | |
6061 PangoGlyphInfo *glyph; | |
6062 | |
6063 glyph = &glyphs->glyphs[i]; | |
6064 | |
6065 if (glyph->attr.is_cluster_start) | |
6066 { | |
6067 int cellcount; | |
6068 | |
6069 cellcount = count_cluster_cells( | |
6070 s, item, glyphs, i, &cluster_width, | |
6071 (item_list != NULL) ? &last_glyph_rbearing : NULL); | |
6072 | |
6073 if (cellcount > 0) | |
6074 { | |
6075 int width; | |
6076 | |
6077 width = cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
6078 glyph->geometry.x_offset += | |
6079 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2; | |
6080 glyph->geometry.width = width; | |
6081 } | |
6082 else | |
6083 { | |
6084 /* If there are only combining characters in the | |
6085 * cluster, we cannot just change the width of the | |
6086 * previous glyph since there is none. Therefore | |
6087 * some guesswork is needed. */ | |
6088 setup_zero_width_cluster(item, glyph, cells, | |
6089 cluster_width, | |
6090 last_glyph_rbearing); | |
6091 } | |
6092 | |
6093 item_cells += cellcount; | |
6094 cells = cellcount; | |
6095 } | |
6096 else if (i > 0) | |
6097 { | |
6098 int width; | |
6099 | |
6100 /* There is a previous glyph, so we deal with combining | |
6101 * characters the canonical way. That is, setting the | |
6102 * width of the previous glyph to 0. */ | |
6103 glyphs->glyphs[i - 1].geometry.width = 0; | |
6104 width = cells * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
6105 glyph->geometry.x_offset += | |
6106 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2; | |
497 | 6107 #if 0 |
6108 /* Dirty hack: for "monospace 13" font there is a bug that | |
6109 * draws composing chars in the wrong position. Add | |
6110 * "width" to the offset to work around that. */ | |
6111 if (monospace13) | |
6112 glyph->geometry.x_offset = width; | |
6113 #endif | |
6114 | |
7 | 6115 glyph->geometry.width = width; |
6116 } | |
6117 else /* i == 0 "cannot happen" */ | |
6118 { | |
6119 glyph->geometry.width = 0; | |
6120 } | |
6121 } | |
6122 | |
6123 /*** Aaaaand action! ***/ | |
6124 draw_glyph_string(row, col + column_offset, item_cells, | |
6125 flags, item->analysis.font, glyphs); | |
6126 | |
6127 pango_item_free(item); | |
6128 | |
6129 column_offset += item_cells; | |
6130 } | |
6131 | |
6132 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list); | |
6133 } | |
6134 | |
26 | 6135 skipitall: |
207 | 6136 /* Draw underline and undercurl. */ |
6137 draw_under(flags, row, col, column_offset); | |
7 | 6138 |
6139 pango_glyph_string_free(glyphs); | |
6140 vim_free(conv_buf); | |
6141 | |
6142 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, NULL); | |
6143 | |
6144 return column_offset; | |
6145 } | |
6146 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
6147 | |
6148 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO) | |
6149 void | |
6150 gui_mch_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags) | |
6151 { | |
6152 static XChar2b *buf = NULL; | |
6153 static int buflen = 0; | |
6154 int is_wide; | |
6155 XChar2b *text; | |
6156 int textlen; | |
6157 XFontStruct *xfont; | |
6158 char_u *p; | |
6159 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
6160 unsigned c; | |
6161 # endif | |
6162 int width; | |
6163 | |
6164 if (gui.current_font == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6165 return; | |
6166 | |
6167 /* | |
6168 * Yeah yeah apparently the font support in GTK+ 1.2 only cares for either: | |
6169 * asians or 8-bit fonts. It is broken there, but no wonder the whole font | |
6170 * stuff is broken in X11 in first place. And the internationalization API | |
6171 * isn't something you would really like to use. | |
6172 */ | |
6173 | |
6174 xfont = (XFontStruct *)((GdkFontPrivate*)gui.current_font)->xfont; | |
6175 is_wide = ((xfont->min_byte1 != 0 || xfont->max_byte1 != 0) | |
6176 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
6177 && gui.fontset == NOFONTSET | |
6178 # endif | |
6179 ); | |
6180 | |
6181 if (is_wide) | |
6182 { | |
6183 /* Convert a byte sequence to 16 bit characters for the Gdk functions. | |
6184 * Need a buffer for the 16 bit characters. Keep it between calls, | |
6185 * because allocating it each time is slow. */ | |
6186 if (buflen < len) | |
6187 { | |
6188 XtFree((char *)buf); | |
6189 buf = (XChar2b *)XtMalloc(len * sizeof(XChar2b)); | |
6190 buflen = len; | |
6191 } | |
6192 | |
6193 p = s; | |
6194 textlen = 0; | |
6195 width = 0; | |
6196 while (p < s + len) | |
6197 { | |
6198 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
6199 if (enc_utf8) | |
6200 { | |
1903 | 6201 int pcc[MAX_MCO]; |
6202 | |
6203 /* TODO: use the composing characters */ | |
2074
1bb06e6512a2
updated for version 7.2.358
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1986
diff
changeset
|
6204 c = utfc_ptr2char_len(p, pcc, len - (p - s)); |
7 | 6205 if (c >= 0x10000) /* show chars > 0xffff as ? */ |
6206 c = 0xbf; | |
6207 buf[textlen].byte1 = c >> 8; | |
6208 buf[textlen].byte2 = c; | |
1903 | 6209 p += utfc_ptr2len_len(p, len - (p - s)); |
7 | 6210 width += utf_char2cells(c); |
6211 } | |
6212 else | |
6213 # endif | |
6214 { | |
6215 buf[textlen].byte1 = '\0'; /* high eight bits */ | |
6216 buf[textlen].byte2 = *p; /* low eight bits */ | |
6217 ++p; | |
6218 ++width; | |
6219 } | |
6220 ++textlen; | |
6221 } | |
6222 text = buf; | |
6223 textlen = textlen * 2; | |
6224 } | |
6225 else | |
6226 { | |
6227 text = (XChar2b *)s; | |
6228 textlen = len; | |
6229 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
6230 if (has_mbyte) | |
6231 { | |
6232 width = 0; | |
1903 | 6233 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += (*mb_ptr2len_len)(p, len - (p - s))) |
6234 width += (*mb_ptr2cells_len)(p, len - (p - s)); | |
7 | 6235 } |
6236 else | |
6237 # endif | |
6238 width = len; | |
6239 } | |
6240 | |
6241 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP)) | |
6242 { | |
6243 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
6244 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
6245 gui.text_gc, | |
6246 TRUE, | |
6247 FILL_X(col), FILL_Y(row), | |
6248 width * gui.char_width, gui.char_height); | |
6249 } | |
6250 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
6251 gdk_draw_text(gui.drawarea->window, | |
6252 gui.current_font, | |
6253 gui.text_gc, | |
6254 TEXT_X(col), TEXT_Y(row), | |
6255 (const gchar *)text, textlen); | |
6256 | |
6257 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */ | |
6258 if (flags & DRAW_BOLD) | |
6259 gdk_draw_text(gui.drawarea->window, | |
6260 gui.current_font, | |
6261 gui.text_gc, | |
6262 TEXT_X(col) + 1, TEXT_Y(row), | |
6263 (const gchar *)text, textlen); | |
6264 | |
207 | 6265 /* Draw underline and undercurl. */ |
6266 draw_under(flags, row, col, width); | |
7 | 6267 } |
6268 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
6269 | |
6270 /* | |
6271 * Return OK if the key with the termcap name "name" is supported. | |
6272 */ | |
6273 int | |
6274 gui_mch_haskey(char_u *name) | |
6275 { | |
6276 int i; | |
6277 | |
6278 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++) | |
6279 if (name[0] == special_keys[i].code0 | |
6280 && name[1] == special_keys[i].code1) | |
6281 return OK; | |
6282 return FAIL; | |
6283 } | |
6284 | |
6285 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) \ | |
6286 || (defined(FEAT_XIM) && !defined(HAVE_GTK2)) \ | |
6287 || defined(PROTO) | |
6288 /* | |
6289 * Return the text window-id and display. Only required for X-based GUI's | |
6290 */ | |
6291 int | |
6292 gui_get_x11_windis(Window *win, Display **dis) | |
6293 { | |
6294 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL) | |
6295 { | |
6296 *dis = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window); | |
6297 *win = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window); | |
6298 return OK; | |
6299 } | |
6300 | |
6301 *dis = NULL; | |
6302 *win = 0; | |
6303 return FAIL; | |
6304 } | |
6305 #endif | |
6306 | |
6307 #if defined(FEAT_CLIENTSERVER) \ | |
6308 || (defined(FEAT_X11) && defined(FEAT_CLIPBOARD)) || defined(PROTO) | |
6309 | |
6310 Display * | |
6311 gui_mch_get_display(void) | |
6312 { | |
6313 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL) | |
6314 return GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window); | |
6315 else | |
6316 return NULL; | |
6317 } | |
6318 #endif | |
6319 | |
6320 void | |
6321 gui_mch_beep(void) | |
6322 { | |
6323 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
6324 GdkDisplay *display; | |
6325 | |
6326 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin)) | |
6327 display = gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin); | |
6328 else | |
6329 display = gdk_display_get_default(); | |
6330 | |
6331 if (display != NULL) | |
6332 gdk_display_beep(display); | |
6333 #else | |
6334 gdk_beep(); | |
6335 #endif | |
6336 } | |
6337 | |
6338 void | |
6339 gui_mch_flash(int msec) | |
6340 { | |
6341 GdkGCValues values; | |
6342 GdkGC *invert_gc; | |
6343 | |
6344 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6345 return; | |
6346 | |
6347 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
6348 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
6349 values.function = GDK_XOR; | |
6350 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window, | |
6351 &values, | |
6352 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND | | |
6353 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND | | |
6354 GDK_GC_FUNCTION); | |
6355 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc, | |
6356 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
6357 /* | |
6358 * Do a visual beep by changing back and forth in some undetermined way, | |
6359 * the foreground and background colors. This is due to the fact that | |
6360 * there can't be really any prediction about the effects of XOR on | |
6361 * arbitrary X11 servers. However this seems to be enough for what we | |
6362 * intend it to do. | |
6363 */ | |
6364 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, | |
6365 TRUE, | |
6366 0, 0, | |
6367 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset, | |
6368 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset); | |
6369 | |
6370 gui_mch_flush(); | |
6371 ui_delay((long)msec, TRUE); /* wait so many msec */ | |
6372 | |
6373 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, | |
6374 TRUE, | |
6375 0, 0, | |
6376 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset, | |
6377 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset); | |
6378 | |
6379 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc); | |
6380 } | |
6381 | |
6382 /* | |
6383 * Invert a rectangle from row r, column c, for nr rows and nc columns. | |
6384 */ | |
6385 void | |
6386 gui_mch_invert_rectangle(int r, int c, int nr, int nc) | |
6387 { | |
6388 GdkGCValues values; | |
6389 GdkGC *invert_gc; | |
6390 | |
6391 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6392 return; | |
6393 | |
944 | 6394 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; |
6395 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
7 | 6396 values.function = GDK_XOR; |
6397 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window, | |
6398 &values, | |
6399 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND | | |
6400 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND | | |
6401 GDK_GC_FUNCTION); | |
944 | 6402 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc, gui.visibility != |
6403 GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
7 | 6404 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, |
6405 TRUE, | |
6406 FILL_X(c), FILL_Y(r), | |
6407 (nc) * gui.char_width, (nr) * gui.char_height); | |
6408 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc); | |
6409 } | |
6410 | |
6411 /* | |
6412 * Iconify the GUI window. | |
6413 */ | |
6414 void | |
6415 gui_mch_iconify(void) | |
6416 { | |
6417 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
6418 gtk_window_iconify(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
6419 #else | |
6420 XIconifyWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
6421 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
6422 DefaultScreen(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window))); | |
6423 #endif | |
6424 } | |
6425 | |
6426 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) | |
6427 /* | |
6428 * Bring the Vim window to the foreground. | |
6429 */ | |
6430 void | |
6431 gui_mch_set_foreground(void) | |
6432 { | |
6433 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
6434 gtk_window_present(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
6435 # else | |
6436 gdk_window_raise(gui.mainwin->window); | |
6437 # endif | |
6438 } | |
6439 #endif | |
6440 | |
6441 /* | |
6442 * Draw a cursor without focus. | |
6443 */ | |
6444 void | |
6445 gui_mch_draw_hollow_cursor(guicolor_T color) | |
6446 { | |
6447 int i = 1; | |
6448 | |
6449 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6450 return; | |
6451 | |
6452 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color); | |
6453 | |
6454 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
6455 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
6456 if (mb_lefthalve(gui.row, gui.col)) | |
6457 i = 2; | |
6458 #endif | |
6459 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
6460 FALSE, | |
6461 FILL_X(gui.col), FILL_Y(gui.row), | |
6462 i * gui.char_width - 1, gui.char_height - 1); | |
6463 } | |
6464 | |
6465 /* | |
6466 * Draw part of a cursor, "w" pixels wide, and "h" pixels high, using | |
6467 * color "color". | |
6468 */ | |
6469 void | |
6470 gui_mch_draw_part_cursor(int w, int h, guicolor_T color) | |
6471 { | |
6472 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6473 return; | |
6474 | |
6475 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color); | |
6476 | |
6477 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
6478 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
6479 TRUE, | |
6480 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT | |
6481 /* vertical line should be on the right of current point */ | |
6482 CURSOR_BAR_RIGHT ? FILL_X(gui.col + 1) - w : | |
6483 #endif | |
6484 FILL_X(gui.col), | |
6485 FILL_Y(gui.row) + gui.char_height - h, | |
6486 w, h); | |
6487 } | |
6488 | |
6489 | |
6490 /* | |
6491 * Catch up with any queued X11 events. This may put keyboard input into the | |
6492 * input buffer, call resize call-backs, trigger timers etc. If there is | |
6493 * nothing in the X11 event queue (& no timers pending), then we return | |
6494 * immediately. | |
6495 */ | |
6496 void | |
6497 gui_mch_update(void) | |
6498 { | |
6499 while (gtk_events_pending() && !vim_is_input_buf_full()) | |
6500 gtk_main_iteration_do(FALSE); | |
6501 } | |
6502 | |
6503 static gint | |
6504 input_timer_cb(gpointer data) | |
6505 { | |
6506 int *timed_out = (int *) data; | |
6507 | |
1226 | 6508 /* Just inform the caller about the occurrence of it */ |
7 | 6509 *timed_out = TRUE; |
6510 | |
6511 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
6512 gtk_main_quit(); | |
6513 | |
6514 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
6515 } | |
6516 | |
6517 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
6518 /* | |
6519 * Callback function, used when data is available on the SNiFF connection. | |
6520 */ | |
6521 static void | |
6522 sniff_request_cb( | |
6523 gpointer data, | |
6524 gint source_fd, | |
6525 GdkInputCondition condition) | |
6526 { | |
6527 static char_u bytes[3] = {CSI, (int)KS_EXTRA, (int)KE_SNIFF}; | |
6528 | |
6529 add_to_input_buf(bytes, 3); | |
6530 | |
6531 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
6532 gtk_main_quit(); | |
6533 } | |
6534 #endif | |
6535 | |
6536 /* | |
6537 * GUI input routine called by gui_wait_for_chars(). Waits for a character | |
6538 * from the keyboard. | |
6539 * wtime == -1 Wait forever. | |
6540 * wtime == 0 This should never happen. | |
6541 * wtime > 0 Wait wtime milliseconds for a character. | |
6542 * Returns OK if a character was found to be available within the given time, | |
6543 * or FAIL otherwise. | |
6544 */ | |
6545 int | |
6546 gui_mch_wait_for_chars(long wtime) | |
6547 { | |
6548 int focus; | |
6549 guint timer; | |
6550 static int timed_out; | |
6551 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
6552 static int sniff_on = 0; | |
6553 static gint sniff_input_id = 0; | |
6554 #endif | |
6555 | |
6556 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
6557 if (sniff_on && !want_sniff_request) | |
6558 { | |
6559 if (sniff_input_id) | |
6560 gdk_input_remove(sniff_input_id); | |
6561 sniff_on = 0; | |
6562 } | |
6563 else if (!sniff_on && want_sniff_request) | |
6564 { | |
6565 /* Add fd_from_sniff to watch for available data in main loop. */ | |
6566 sniff_input_id = gdk_input_add(fd_from_sniff, | |
6567 GDK_INPUT_READ, sniff_request_cb, NULL); | |
6568 sniff_on = 1; | |
6569 } | |
6570 #endif | |
6571 | |
6572 timed_out = FALSE; | |
6573 | |
6574 /* this timeout makes sure that we will return if no characters arrived in | |
6575 * time */ | |
6576 | |
6577 if (wtime > 0) | |
6578 timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)wtime, input_timer_cb, &timed_out); | |
6579 else | |
6580 timer = 0; | |
6581 | |
6582 focus = gui.in_focus; | |
6583 | |
6584 do | |
6585 { | |
6586 /* Stop or start blinking when focus changes */ | |
6587 if (gui.in_focus != focus) | |
6588 { | |
6589 if (gui.in_focus) | |
6590 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
6591 else | |
6592 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
6593 focus = gui.in_focus; | |
6594 } | |
6595 | |
1624 | 6596 #if defined(FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG) |
6597 /* Process the queued netbeans messages. */ | |
2210 | 6598 netbeans_parse_messages(); |
1624 | 6599 #endif |
6600 | |
7 | 6601 /* |
6602 * Loop in GTK+ processing until a timeout or input occurs. | |
22 | 6603 * Skip this if input is available anyway (can happen in rare |
6604 * situations, sort of race condition). | |
7 | 6605 */ |
22 | 6606 if (!input_available()) |
6607 gtk_main(); | |
7 | 6608 |
6609 /* Got char, return immediately */ | |
6610 if (input_available()) | |
6611 { | |
6612 if (timer != 0 && !timed_out) | |
6613 gtk_timeout_remove(timer); | |
6614 return OK; | |
6615 } | |
6616 } while (wtime < 0 || !timed_out); | |
6617 | |
6618 /* | |
6619 * Flush all eventually pending (drawing) events. | |
6620 */ | |
6621 gui_mch_update(); | |
6622 | |
6623 return FAIL; | |
6624 } | |
6625 | |
6626 | |
6627 /**************************************************************************** | |
6628 * Output drawing routines. | |
6629 ****************************************************************************/ | |
6630 | |
6631 | |
6632 /* Flush any output to the screen */ | |
6633 void | |
6634 gui_mch_flush(void) | |
6635 { | |
6636 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
6637 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin)) | |
6638 gdk_display_sync(gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin)); | |
6639 #else | |
6640 gdk_flush(); /* historical misnomer: calls XSync(), not XFlush() */ | |
6641 #endif | |
6642 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
6643 /* This happens to actually do what gui_mch_flush() is supposed to do, | |
6644 * according to the comment above. */ | |
6645 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
6646 gdk_window_process_updates(gui.drawarea->window, FALSE); | |
6647 #endif | |
6648 } | |
6649 | |
6650 /* | |
6651 * Clear a rectangular region of the screen from text pos (row1, col1) to | |
6652 * (row2, col2) inclusive. | |
6653 */ | |
6654 void | |
6655 gui_mch_clear_block(int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2) | |
6656 { | |
6657 GdkColor color; | |
6658 | |
6659 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6660 return; | |
6661 | |
6662 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel; | |
6663 | |
6664 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, &color); | |
6665 | |
6666 /* Clear one extra pixel at the far right, for when bold characters have | |
6667 * spilled over to the window border. */ | |
6668 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, TRUE, | |
6669 FILL_X(col1), FILL_Y(row1), | |
6670 (col2 - col1 + 1) * gui.char_width | |
6671 + (col2 == Columns - 1), | |
6672 (row2 - row1 + 1) * gui.char_height); | |
6673 } | |
6674 | |
6675 void | |
6676 gui_mch_clear_all(void) | |
6677 { | |
6678 if (gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
6679 gdk_window_clear(gui.drawarea->window); | |
6680 } | |
6681 | |
6682 /* | |
6683 * Redraw any text revealed by scrolling up/down. | |
6684 */ | |
6685 static void | |
6686 check_copy_area(void) | |
6687 { | |
6688 GdkEvent *event; | |
6689 int expose_count; | |
6690 | |
6691 if (gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_PARTIAL) | |
6692 return; | |
6693 | |
6694 /* Avoid redrawing the cursor while scrolling or it'll end up where | |
6695 * we don't want it to be. I'm not sure if it's correct to call | |
6696 * gui_dont_update_cursor() at this point but it works as a quick | |
6697 * fix for now. */ | |
6698 gui_dont_update_cursor(); | |
6699 | |
6700 do | |
6701 { | |
6702 /* Wait to check whether the scroll worked or not. */ | |
6703 event = gdk_event_get_graphics_expose(gui.drawarea->window); | |
6704 | |
6705 if (event == NULL) | |
6706 break; /* received NoExpose event */ | |
6707 | |
6708 gui_redraw(event->expose.area.x, event->expose.area.y, | |
6709 event->expose.area.width, event->expose.area.height); | |
6710 | |
6711 expose_count = event->expose.count; | |
6712 gdk_event_free(event); | |
6713 } | |
6714 while (expose_count > 0); /* more events follow */ | |
6715 | |
6716 gui_can_update_cursor(); | |
6717 } | |
6718 | |
6719 /* | |
6720 * Delete the given number of lines from the given row, scrolling up any | |
6721 * text further down within the scroll region. | |
6722 */ | |
6723 void | |
6724 gui_mch_delete_lines(int row, int num_lines) | |
6725 { | |
6726 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED) | |
6727 return; /* Can't see the window */ | |
6728 | |
6729 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
6730 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
6731 | |
6732 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */ | |
6733 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
6734 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row), | |
6735 gui.drawarea->window, | |
6736 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), | |
6737 FILL_Y(row + num_lines), | |
6738 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right | |
6739 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1, | |
6740 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1)); | |
6741 | |
6742 gui_clear_block(gui.scroll_region_bot - num_lines + 1, | |
6743 gui.scroll_region_left, | |
6744 gui.scroll_region_bot, gui.scroll_region_right); | |
6745 check_copy_area(); | |
6746 } | |
6747 | |
6748 /* | |
6749 * Insert the given number of lines before the given row, scrolling down any | |
6750 * following text within the scroll region. | |
6751 */ | |
6752 void | |
6753 gui_mch_insert_lines(int row, int num_lines) | |
6754 { | |
6755 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED) | |
6756 return; /* Can't see the window */ | |
6757 | |
6758 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
6759 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
6760 | |
6761 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */ | |
6762 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
6763 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row + num_lines), | |
6764 gui.drawarea->window, | |
6765 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row), | |
6766 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right | |
6767 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1, | |
6768 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1)); | |
6769 | |
6770 gui_clear_block(row, gui.scroll_region_left, | |
6771 row + num_lines - 1, gui.scroll_region_right); | |
6772 check_copy_area(); | |
6773 } | |
6774 | |
6775 /* | |
6776 * X Selection stuff, for cutting and pasting text to other windows. | |
6777 */ | |
6778 void | |
6779 clip_mch_request_selection(VimClipboard *cbd) | |
6780 { | |
6781 GdkAtom target; | |
6782 unsigned i; | |
1494 | 6783 time_t start; |
7 | 6784 |
6785 for (i = 0; i < N_SELECTION_TARGETS; ++i) | |
6786 { | |
1904 | 6787 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE |
6788 if (!clip_html && selection_targets[i].info == TARGET_HTML) | |
6789 continue; | |
6790 #endif | |
7 | 6791 received_selection = RS_NONE; |
6792 target = gdk_atom_intern(selection_targets[i].target, FALSE); | |
6793 | |
6794 gtk_selection_convert(gui.drawarea, | |
6795 cbd->gtk_sel_atom, target, | |
6796 (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME); | |
6797 | |
1494 | 6798 /* Hack: Wait up to three seconds for the selection. A hang was |
6799 * noticed here when using the netrw plugin combined with ":gui" | |
6800 * during the FocusGained event. */ | |
6801 start = time(NULL); | |
6802 while (received_selection == RS_NONE && time(NULL) < start + 3) | |
7 | 6803 gtk_main(); /* wait for selection_received_cb */ |
6804 | |
6805 if (received_selection != RS_FAIL) | |
6806 return; | |
6807 } | |
6808 | |
6809 /* Final fallback position - use the X CUT_BUFFER0 store */ | |
1924 | 6810 yank_cut_buffer0(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), cbd); |
7 | 6811 } |
6812 | |
6813 /* | |
6814 * Disown the selection. | |
6815 */ | |
6816 void | |
1884 | 6817 clip_mch_lose_selection(VimClipboard *cbd UNUSED) |
7 | 6818 { |
6819 /* WEIRD: when using NULL to actually disown the selection, we lose the | |
6820 * selection the first time we own it. */ | |
6821 /* | |
6822 gtk_selection_owner_set(NULL, cbd->gtk_sel_atom, (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME); | |
6823 gui_mch_update(); | |
6824 */ | |
6825 } | |
6826 | |
6827 /* | |
6828 * Own the selection and return OK if it worked. | |
6829 */ | |
6830 int | |
6831 clip_mch_own_selection(VimClipboard *cbd) | |
6832 { | |
6833 int success; | |
6834 | |
6835 success = gtk_selection_owner_set(gui.drawarea, cbd->gtk_sel_atom, | |
6836 (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME); | |
6837 gui_mch_update(); | |
6838 return (success) ? OK : FAIL; | |
6839 } | |
6840 | |
6841 /* | |
6842 * Send the current selection to the clipboard. Do nothing for X because we | |
6843 * will fill in the selection only when requested by another app. | |
6844 */ | |
6845 void | |
1884 | 6846 clip_mch_set_selection(VimClipboard *cbd UNUSED) |
7 | 6847 { |
6848 } | |
6849 | |
6850 | |
6851 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO) | |
6852 /* | |
6853 * Make a menu item appear either active or not active (grey or not grey). | |
6854 */ | |
6855 void | |
6856 gui_mch_menu_grey(vimmenu_T *menu, int grey) | |
6857 { | |
6858 if (menu->id == NULL) | |
6859 return; | |
6860 | |
6861 if (menu_is_separator(menu->name)) | |
6862 grey = TRUE; | |
6863 | |
6864 gui_mch_menu_hidden(menu, FALSE); | |
6865 /* Be clever about bitfields versus true booleans here! */ | |
6866 if (!GTK_WIDGET_SENSITIVE(menu->id) == !grey) | |
6867 { | |
6868 gtk_widget_set_sensitive(menu->id, !grey); | |
6869 gui_mch_update(); | |
6870 } | |
6871 } | |
6872 | |
6873 /* | |
6874 * Make menu item hidden or not hidden. | |
6875 */ | |
6876 void | |
6877 gui_mch_menu_hidden(vimmenu_T *menu, int hidden) | |
6878 { | |
6879 if (menu->id == 0) | |
6880 return; | |
6881 | |
6882 if (hidden) | |
6883 { | |
6884 if (GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id)) | |
6885 { | |
6886 gtk_widget_hide(menu->id); | |
6887 gui_mch_update(); | |
6888 } | |
6889 } | |
6890 else | |
6891 { | |
6892 if (!GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id)) | |
6893 { | |
6894 gtk_widget_show(menu->id); | |
6895 gui_mch_update(); | |
6896 } | |
6897 } | |
6898 } | |
6899 | |
6900 /* | |
6901 * This is called after setting all the menus to grey/hidden or not. | |
6902 */ | |
6903 void | |
6904 gui_mch_draw_menubar(void) | |
6905 { | |
6906 /* just make sure that the visual changes get effect immediately */ | |
6907 gui_mch_update(); | |
6908 } | |
6909 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
6910 | |
6911 /* | |
6912 * Scrollbar stuff. | |
6913 */ | |
6914 void | |
6915 gui_mch_enable_scrollbar(scrollbar_T *sb, int flag) | |
6916 { | |
6917 if (sb->id == NULL) | |
6918 return; | |
6919 | |
6920 if (flag) | |
6921 gtk_widget_show(sb->id); | |
6922 else | |
6923 gtk_widget_hide(sb->id); | |
6924 | |
791 | 6925 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
7 | 6926 } |
6927 | |
6928 | |
6929 /* | |
6930 * Return the RGB value of a pixel as long. | |
6931 */ | |
6932 long_u | |
6933 gui_mch_get_rgb(guicolor_T pixel) | |
6934 { | |
6935 GdkColor color; | |
6936 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
6937 GdkColorContext *cc; | |
6938 | |
6939 cc = gdk_color_context_new(gtk_widget_get_visual(gui.drawarea), | |
6940 gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea)); | |
6941 color.pixel = pixel; | |
6942 gdk_color_context_query_color(cc, &color); | |
6943 | |
6944 gdk_color_context_free(cc); | |
6945 #else | |
6946 gdk_colormap_query_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), | |
6947 (unsigned long)pixel, &color); | |
6948 #endif | |
6949 | |
6950 return (((unsigned)color.red & 0xff00) << 8) | |
6951 | ((unsigned)color.green & 0xff00) | |
6952 | (((unsigned)color.blue & 0xff00) >> 8); | |
6953 } | |
6954 | |
6955 /* | |
88 | 6956 * Get current mouse coordinates in text window. |
7 | 6957 */ |
88 | 6958 void |
6959 gui_mch_getmouse(int *x, int *y) | |
7 | 6960 { |
88 | 6961 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, x, y, NULL); |
7 | 6962 } |
6963 | |
6964 void | |
6965 gui_mch_setmouse(int x, int y) | |
6966 { | |
6967 /* Sorry for the Xlib call, but we can't avoid it, since there is no | |
6968 * internal GDK mechanism present to accomplish this. (and for good | |
6969 * reason...) */ | |
6970 XWarpPointer(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.drawarea->window), | |
6971 (Window)0, GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.drawarea->window), | |
6972 0, 0, 0U, 0U, x, y); | |
6973 } | |
6974 | |
6975 | |
6976 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE | |
6977 /* The last set mouse pointer shape is remembered, to be used when it goes | |
6978 * from hidden to not hidden. */ | |
6979 static int last_shape = 0; | |
6980 #endif | |
6981 | |
6982 /* | |
6983 * Use the blank mouse pointer or not. | |
6984 * | |
6985 * hide: TRUE = use blank ptr, FALSE = use parent ptr | |
6986 */ | |
6987 void | |
6988 gui_mch_mousehide(int hide) | |
6989 { | |
6990 if (gui.pointer_hidden != hide) | |
6991 { | |
6992 gui.pointer_hidden = hide; | |
6993 if (gui.drawarea->window && gui.blank_pointer != NULL) | |
6994 { | |
6995 if (hide) | |
6996 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
6997 else | |
6998 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE | |
6999 mch_set_mouse_shape(last_shape); | |
7000 #else | |
7001 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, NULL); | |
7002 #endif | |
7003 } | |
7004 } | |
7005 } | |
7006 | |
7007 #if defined(FEAT_MOUSESHAPE) || defined(PROTO) | |
7008 | |
7009 /* Table for shape IDs. Keep in sync with the mshape_names[] table in | |
7010 * misc2.c! */ | |
7011 static const int mshape_ids[] = | |
7012 { | |
7013 GDK_LEFT_PTR, /* arrow */ | |
7014 GDK_CURSOR_IS_PIXMAP, /* blank */ | |
7015 GDK_XTERM, /* beam */ | |
7016 GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* updown */ | |
7017 GDK_SIZING, /* udsizing */ | |
7018 GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* leftright */ | |
7019 GDK_SIZING, /* lrsizing */ | |
7020 GDK_WATCH, /* busy */ | |
7021 GDK_X_CURSOR, /* no */ | |
7022 GDK_CROSSHAIR, /* crosshair */ | |
7023 GDK_HAND1, /* hand1 */ | |
7024 GDK_HAND2, /* hand2 */ | |
7025 GDK_PENCIL, /* pencil */ | |
7026 GDK_QUESTION_ARROW, /* question */ | |
7027 GDK_RIGHT_PTR, /* right-arrow */ | |
7028 GDK_CENTER_PTR, /* up-arrow */ | |
7029 GDK_LEFT_PTR /* last one */ | |
7030 }; | |
7031 | |
7032 void | |
7033 mch_set_mouse_shape(int shape) | |
7034 { | |
7035 int id; | |
7036 GdkCursor *c; | |
7037 | |
7038 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
7039 return; | |
7040 | |
7041 if (shape == MSHAPE_HIDE || gui.pointer_hidden) | |
7042 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
7043 else | |
7044 { | |
7045 if (shape >= MSHAPE_NUMBERED) | |
7046 { | |
7047 id = shape - MSHAPE_NUMBERED; | |
7048 if (id >= GDK_LAST_CURSOR) | |
7049 id = GDK_LEFT_PTR; | |
7050 else | |
7051 id &= ~1; /* they are always even (why?) */ | |
7052 } | |
1884 | 7053 else if (shape < (int)(sizeof(mshape_ids) / sizeof(int))) |
7 | 7054 id = mshape_ids[shape]; |
842 | 7055 else |
7056 return; | |
7 | 7057 # ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD |
7058 c = gdk_cursor_new_for_display( | |
136 | 7059 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.drawarea), (GdkCursorType)id); |
7 | 7060 # else |
136 | 7061 c = gdk_cursor_new((GdkCursorType)id); |
7 | 7062 # endif |
7063 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, c); | |
7064 gdk_cursor_destroy(c); /* Unref, actually. Bloody GTK+ 1. */ | |
7065 } | |
7066 if (shape != MSHAPE_HIDE) | |
7067 last_shape = shape; | |
7068 } | |
7069 #endif /* FEAT_MOUSESHAPE */ | |
7070 | |
7071 | |
7072 #if defined(FEAT_SIGN_ICONS) || defined(PROTO) | |
7073 /* | |
7074 * Signs are currently always 2 chars wide. With GTK+ 2, the image will be | |
7075 * scaled down if the current font is not big enough, or scaled up if the image | |
7076 * size is less than 3/4 of the maximum sign size. With GTK+ 1, the pixmap | |
7077 * will be cut off if the current font is not big enough, or centered if it's | |
7078 * too small. | |
7079 */ | |
7080 # define SIGN_WIDTH (2 * gui.char_width) | |
7081 # define SIGN_HEIGHT (gui.char_height) | |
7082 # define SIGN_ASPECT ((double)SIGN_HEIGHT / (double)SIGN_WIDTH) | |
7083 | |
7084 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
7085 | |
7086 void | |
7087 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr) | |
7088 { | |
7089 GdkPixbuf *sign; | |
7090 | |
7091 sign = (GdkPixbuf *)sign_get_image(typenr); | |
7092 | |
7093 if (sign != NULL && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
7094 { | |
7095 int width; | |
7096 int height; | |
7097 int xoffset; | |
7098 int yoffset; | |
7099 int need_scale; | |
7100 | |
7101 width = gdk_pixbuf_get_width(sign); | |
7102 height = gdk_pixbuf_get_height(sign); | |
7103 /* | |
7104 * Decide whether we need to scale. Allow one pixel of border | |
7105 * width to be cut off, in order to avoid excessive scaling for | |
7106 * tiny differences in font size. | |
7107 */ | |
7108 need_scale = (width > SIGN_WIDTH + 2 | |
7109 || height > SIGN_HEIGHT + 2 | |
7110 || (width < 3 * SIGN_WIDTH / 4 | |
7111 && height < 3 * SIGN_HEIGHT / 4)); | |
7112 if (need_scale) | |
7113 { | |
7114 double aspect; | |
7115 | |
7116 /* Keep the original aspect ratio */ | |
7117 aspect = (double)height / (double)width; | |
7118 width = (double)SIGN_WIDTH * SIGN_ASPECT / aspect; | |
7119 width = MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH); | |
7120 height = (double)width * aspect; | |
7121 | |
7122 /* This doesn't seem to be worth caching, and doing so | |
7123 * would complicate the code quite a bit. */ | |
7124 sign = gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple(sign, width, height, | |
7125 GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR); | |
7126 if (sign == NULL) | |
7127 return; /* out of memory */ | |
7128 } | |
7129 | |
7130 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore | |
7131 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than | |
7132 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */ | |
7133 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2; | |
7134 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2; | |
7135 | |
7136 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
7137 | |
7138 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
7139 gui.text_gc, | |
7140 TRUE, | |
7141 FILL_X(col), | |
7142 FILL_Y(row), | |
7143 SIGN_WIDTH, | |
7144 SIGN_HEIGHT); | |
7145 | |
7146 # if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,1) | |
7147 gdk_draw_pixbuf(gui.drawarea->window, | |
7148 NULL, | |
7149 sign, | |
7150 MAX(0, xoffset), | |
7151 MAX(0, yoffset), | |
7152 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset), | |
7153 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset), | |
7154 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH), | |
7155 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT), | |
7156 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL, | |
7157 0, 0); | |
7158 # else | |
7159 gdk_pixbuf_render_to_drawable_alpha(sign, | |
7160 gui.drawarea->window, | |
7161 MAX(0, xoffset), | |
7162 MAX(0, yoffset), | |
7163 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset), | |
7164 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset), | |
7165 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH), | |
7166 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT), | |
7167 GDK_PIXBUF_ALPHA_BILEVEL, | |
7168 127, | |
7169 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL, | |
7170 0, 0); | |
7171 # endif | |
7172 if (need_scale) | |
7173 g_object_unref(sign); | |
7174 } | |
7175 } | |
7176 | |
7177 void * | |
7178 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile) | |
7179 { | |
7180 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-' && gui.in_use) | |
7181 { | |
7182 GdkPixbuf *sign; | |
7183 GError *error = NULL; | |
7184 char_u *message; | |
7185 | |
7186 sign = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file((const char *)signfile, &error); | |
7187 | |
7188 if (error == NULL) | |
7189 return sign; | |
7190 | |
7191 message = (char_u *)error->message; | |
7192 | |
7193 if (message != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
7194 message = string_convert(&input_conv, message, NULL); | |
7195 | |
7196 if (message != NULL) | |
7197 { | |
7198 /* The error message is already translated and will be more | |
7199 * descriptive than anything we could possibly do ourselves. */ | |
7200 EMSG2("E255: %s", message); | |
7201 | |
7202 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
7203 vim_free(message); | |
7204 } | |
7205 g_error_free(error); | |
7206 } | |
7207 | |
7208 return NULL; | |
7209 } | |
7210 | |
7211 void | |
7212 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign) | |
7213 { | |
7214 if (sign != NULL) | |
7215 g_object_unref(sign); | |
7216 } | |
7217 | |
7218 # else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
7219 | |
7220 typedef struct | |
7221 { | |
7222 GdkPixmap *pixmap; | |
7223 GdkBitmap *mask; | |
7224 } | |
7225 signicon_T; | |
7226 | |
7227 void | |
7228 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr) | |
7229 { | |
7230 signicon_T *sign; | |
7231 | |
7232 sign = (signicon_T *)sign_get_image(typenr); | |
7233 | |
7234 if (sign != NULL && sign->pixmap != NULL | |
7235 && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
7236 { | |
7237 int width; | |
7238 int height; | |
7239 int xoffset; | |
7240 int yoffset; | |
7241 | |
7242 gdk_window_get_size(sign->pixmap, &width, &height); | |
7243 | |
7244 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore | |
7245 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than | |
7246 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */ | |
7247 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2; | |
7248 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2; | |
7249 | |
7250 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
7251 | |
7252 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
7253 gui.text_gc, | |
7254 TRUE, | |
7255 FILL_X(col), | |
7256 FILL_Y(row), | |
7257 SIGN_WIDTH, | |
7258 SIGN_HEIGHT); | |
7259 | |
7260 /* Set the clip mask for bilevel transparency */ | |
7261 if (sign->mask != NULL) | |
7262 { | |
7263 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc, | |
7264 FILL_X(col) - xoffset, | |
7265 FILL_Y(row) - yoffset); | |
7266 gdk_gc_set_clip_mask(gui.text_gc, sign->mask); | |
7267 } | |
7268 | |
7269 gdk_draw_pixmap(gui.drawarea->window, | |
7270 gui.text_gc, | |
7271 sign->pixmap, | |
7272 MAX(0, xoffset), | |
7273 MAX(0, yoffset), | |
7274 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset), | |
7275 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset), | |
7276 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH), | |
7277 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT)); | |
7278 | |
7279 gdk_gc_set_clip_mask(gui.text_gc, NULL); | |
7280 } | |
7281 } | |
7282 | |
7283 void * | |
7284 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile) | |
7285 { | |
7286 signicon_T *sign = NULL; | |
7287 | |
7288 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-' | |
7289 && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
7290 { | |
7291 sign = (signicon_T *)alloc(sizeof(signicon_T)); | |
7292 | |
7293 if (sign != NULL) /* NULL == OOM == "cannot really happen" */ | |
7294 { | |
7295 sign->mask = NULL; | |
7296 sign->pixmap = gdk_pixmap_colormap_create_from_xpm( | |
7297 gui.drawarea->window, NULL, | |
7298 &sign->mask, NULL, | |
7299 (const char *)signfile); | |
7300 | |
7301 if (sign->pixmap == NULL) | |
7302 { | |
7303 vim_free(sign); | |
7304 sign = NULL; | |
7305 EMSG(_(e_signdata)); | |
7306 } | |
7307 } | |
7308 } | |
7309 return sign; | |
7310 } | |
7311 | |
7312 void | |
7313 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign) | |
7314 { | |
7315 if (sign != NULL) | |
7316 { | |
7317 signicon_T *signicon = (signicon_T *)sign; | |
7318 | |
7319 if (signicon->pixmap != NULL) | |
7320 gdk_pixmap_unref(signicon->pixmap); | |
7321 if (signicon->mask != NULL) | |
7322 gdk_bitmap_unref(signicon->mask); | |
7323 | |
7324 vim_free(signicon); | |
7325 } | |
7326 } | |
7327 # endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
7328 | |
7329 #endif /* FEAT_SIGN_ICONS */ |